summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2023-03-09 21:08:53 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2023-03-09 21:08:53 +0000
commit31937c168a60aab51d63b5a108bc60e1184671da (patch)
treea55a90d67ed64ff64eda806d57537cb948de80d4 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev
parent0a512413e311258d2e33d614f7483bc30e71f188 (diff)
latex-dev (9mar23)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@66491 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmextra.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ec.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fontdef.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/format.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.ins6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltalloc.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltbibl.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltboxes.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltclass.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcmd.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcntrl.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcounts.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdefns.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdirchk.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lterror.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltexpl.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfilehook.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfiles.dtx14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfinal.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfloat.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfntcmd.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssaxes.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssbas.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsscmp.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssdcl.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssini.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsstrc.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthooks.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthyphen.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltidxglo.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltkeys.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlength.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlists.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlogos.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.dtx6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmath.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmiscen.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutput.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpage.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpageno.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpar.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpara.dtx68
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpictur.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltplain.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltsect.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltshipout.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltspace.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttab.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttextcomp.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltthm.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltvers.dtx4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxref.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newdc.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newlfont.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/olddc.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/oldlfont.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/preload.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.ins8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/tulm.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/unpack.ins2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx61
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-amsmath.dtx131
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx3821
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx1418
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx102
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx1277
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtools.dtx223
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx159
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or.dtx)10
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx810
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx78
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx203
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx443
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx365
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins39
112 files changed, 8972 insertions, 506 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.dtx
index 908fe924001..548b91bcea8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.ins
index f46404bcf4d..3f40ddc0f0d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.dtx
index 188679d4d94..e16dc657a1d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.ins
index 1f7b3316911..50a51ea666c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmextra.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmextra.ins
index a2befb3aefb..0fa45183fc9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmextra.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmextra.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.ins
index 55af4759c57..af5ac7e5f86 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.dtx
index de20073c481..be373499e6b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.ins
index e2187594a44..79d4c429ddd 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ec.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ec.ins
index 47823e7edf2..15a7c3848cf 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ec.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ec.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.dtx
index bc884c4db07..89890a41981 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.ins
index d202aad7cf3..ae75460ee53 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.dtx
index 5f8983ed345..9e39cd192b9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.ins
index b688cd66cfa..68c67924123 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fontdef.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fontdef.dtx
index 06af8feefd3..5e88e550791 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fontdef.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fontdef.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/format.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/format.ins
index 369f01a7c53..74cd78ff4a8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/format.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/format.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 2015-2022
+Copyright (C) 2015-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
This is a generated file.
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.dtx
index 78bb688f83d..6b7bc8b8229 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.ins
index d82cbd66706..43ba83aae3c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.dtx
index d36042990d4..aefc4a76660 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.ins
index 88047e94f05..697a4a38b3f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.dtx
index e056f8ffd78..02956a8c07b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.ins
index adacf9efce8..38578270709 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.dtx
index 768f7237a58..b84564bb55f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.ins
index f530347a3cf..0c90fa36ea7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.dtx
index 132a2548e44..4abde253e16 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.ins
index b5e97a94798..61315f8e078 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.dtx
index 62fb097c0d2..e4e1559e277 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.ins
index 468afddd678..12d658bca98 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.dtx
index 4052c260c86..3e3c36d3d06 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.ins
index c078dc59ce9..c522f39e595 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltalloc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltalloc.dtx
index 4530d4b07ba..c3498fb9c70 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltalloc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltalloc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltbibl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltbibl.dtx
index 4c219657b87..8e34ca685ae 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltbibl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltbibl.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltboxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltboxes.dtx
index b82f5bdb8e2..ff1717caa97 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltboxes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltboxes.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltclass.dtx
index 63c42f6cd07..f6d5994d3fc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltclass.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltclass.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcmd.dtx
index 30a1908c473..78a5a389aec 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcmd.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcmd.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
%
% Copyright (C) 1999 Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley, David Carlisle
% Copyright (C) 2004-2008 Frank Mittelbach, The LaTeX3 Project
-% Copyright (C) 2009-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2009-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcntrl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcntrl.dtx
index 5ebe256c75d..52dcdbf9837 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcntrl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcntrl.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcounts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcounts.dtx
index ffe2265ac39..69025fa479f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcounts.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcounts.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdefns.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdefns.dtx
index c604bd96206..209c4e0fbab 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdefns.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdefns.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdirchk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdirchk.dtx
index 16a2ed9e681..6e029297544 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdirchk.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdirchk.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lterror.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lterror.dtx
index b302a9a74c0..77672168ce1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lterror.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lterror.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltexpl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltexpl.dtx
index aab189bec28..92e6de52cb6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltexpl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltexpl.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2019-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfilehook.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfilehook.dtx
index c8503de8916..d43ffc857dc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfilehook.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfilehook.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2020-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2020-2023
% Frank Mittelbach, Phelype Oleinik & LaTeX Team
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfiles.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfiles.dtx
index d99dfdcd48f..042565299a6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfiles.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfiles.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltfiles.dtx}
- [2022/05/27 v1.2r LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)]
+ [2023/01/05 v1.2s LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltfiles.dtx}
@@ -417,6 +417,16 @@
\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% Provide a global definition for \cs{do} as well, so that it is
+% already defined in the preamble and not late as
+% \verb=\begin{document}= overwriting some definition given by the
+% unsuspecting user in the preamble.
+% \changes{v1.2s}{2023/01/05}{\cs{do} now with default definition in
+% the kernel (gh/975)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\do\noexpand
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% The \hook{begindocument} hook already existed in the kernel since
% 1994 under the name \cs{atbegindocumenthook} the
% additional ones are originally from the \pkg{etoolbox}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfinal.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfinal.dtx
index a19ffa83052..9fa6bbc856e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfinal.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfinal.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfloat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfloat.dtx
index 8b5b92759a2..72478245483 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfloat.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfloat.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfntcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
index 64064abcb53..bb6dbfe75ca 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssaxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssaxes.dtx
index 843e8b544c5..9e68b38654e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssaxes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssaxes.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2019-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssbas.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssbas.dtx
index cc43622a4bc..019fca9abaa 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssbas.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssbas.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsscmp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
index 09f43a0d941..7bdfe2fd3ee 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssdcl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
index 49041605e99..c3a743d249d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssini.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssini.dtx
index 12e3b6289be..7b43f0228b7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssini.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssini.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsstrc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
index 699fd2c5943..be0e6c68cf6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthooks.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthooks.dtx
index cfa1454775d..1255c63a8c6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthooks.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthooks.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2020-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2020-2023
% Frank Mittelbach, Phelype Oleinik & LaTeX Team
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthyphen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthyphen.dtx
index b7cede11750..88d30c9ccac 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthyphen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthyphen.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltidxglo.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltidxglo.dtx
index 395fe839759..a2dc6b873ee 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltidxglo.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltidxglo.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltkeys.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltkeys.dtx
index edf12f7cb25..80c36d5cd9a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltkeys.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltkeys.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2021-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2021-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlength.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlength.dtx
index f979dd4e239..10e4b671c81 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlength.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlength.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlists.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlists.dtx
index d0413dad082..afde14e0709 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlists.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlists.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlogos.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlogos.dtx
index 56453f73dbc..7589cf36e1b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlogos.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlogos.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.dtx
index 6c66a96be0e..135cb630096 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2015-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2015-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
\ProvidesFile{ltluatex.dtx}
%</driver>
%<*tex>
-[2022/10/03 v1.2a
+[2023/01/19 v1.2b
%</tex>
%<plain> LuaTeX support for plain TeX (core)
%<*tex>
@@ -968,10 +968,10 @@ local luatexbase = luatexbase
%
% Some Lua best practice: use local versions of functions where possible.
% \changes{v1.1u}{2021/08/11}{Define missing local function}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{2023/01/19}{Remove unused local variable tex_setattribute}
% \begin{macrocode}
local string_gsub = string.gsub
local tex_count = tex.count
-local tex_setattribute = tex.setattribute
local tex_setcount = tex.setcount
local texio_write_nl = texio.write_nl
local flush_list = node.flush_list
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmath.dtx
index 60394460f57..746a3077fb5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmath.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmath.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmiscen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmiscen.dtx
index 69a7ac69634..801d1e68627 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmiscen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmiscen.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.dtx
index 4dac4e15486..1d257805a43 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.ins
index 8ff0f02608d..2f0c39517fe 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutput.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutput.dtx
index 1cbc7ab0b1b..29024dd4d6a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutput.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutput.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpage.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpage.dtx
index 1d514fc7c75..1a6586d067e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpage.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpage.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpageno.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpageno.dtx
index 8142639633f..6c02d0fa7f7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpageno.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpageno.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpar.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpar.dtx
index 50ff57183cc..31d863610b4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpar.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpar.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpara.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpara.dtx
index 9296f2b2cd9..7c96c72fc70 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpara.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpara.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-%% File: ltpara.dtx (C) Copyright 2020-2021
+%% File: ltpara.dtx (C) Copyright 2020-2023
% Frank Mittelbach, LaTeX Team
%
% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
%%% From File: ltpara.dtx
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ltparaversion{v1.0k}
-\def\ltparadate{2022/05/13}
+\def\ltparaversion{v1.0l}
+\def\ltparadate{2023/01/30}
% \end{macrocode}
%<*driver>
\documentclass{l3doc}
@@ -729,6 +729,8 @@
% for error recovery and so altering \cs{tex_everypar:D} all the
% time should be a tiny bit faster.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2023/06/01}
+%<latexrelease> {\g_@@_standard_everypar_tl}{minipage~ fix}
\tl_new:N \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl
% \end{macrocode}
% Here is now its definition:
@@ -769,7 +771,28 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\group_begin:
\tex_everypar:D {}
- \skip_zero:N \tex_parskip:D
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There has been a long-standing problem with \LaTeX's minipages in
+% that invisible material at the beginning of a minipage (such as a
+% \cs{color} setting) would result in \cs{parskip} being added in
+% front of the first paragraph---something that is not done by
+% \TeX{} if a vertical list is completely empty. As this is
+% happening on a very low-level in the engine it wasn't really
+% possible to find out if this \cs{parskip} was added or if a space
+% we see in front of the current point is legitimate. However, with
+% the new paragraph handling we are in a better position: while we
+% still don't know if there is such a space or not, we do know
+% if we have just created an empty paragraph. Thus, if we now set
+% \cs{parskip} to \texttt{-}\cs{parskip} the two will cancel each other
+% if present and if the first was ignored because the vertical list
+% was empty, then the second will be ignored too because it is
+% still empty. Of course, we don't want to cancel always but only
+% at the start of a minipage and that is signaled with the
+% \texttt{@minipage} switch.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{2023/01/30}{Backout \cs{parskip} at top of minipage (gh/989)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \skip_set:Nn \tex_parskip:D
+ { \if@minipage -\tex_parskip:D \else: \c_zero_skip \fi: }
\tex_noindent:D
\group_end:
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -800,6 +823,43 @@
\@@_handle_indent:
% \the \everypar % <--- done differently below
}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
+%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}
+%<latexrelease> {\g_@@_standard_everypar_tl}{minipage~ fix}
+%<latexrelease>
+%<latexrelease>\tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl {
+%<latexrelease> \box_gset_to_last:N \g_para_indent_box
+%<latexrelease> \group_begin:
+%<latexrelease> \tex_par:D
+%<latexrelease> \group_end:
+%<latexrelease> \tex_everypar:D { \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{before}{vertical} }
+%<latexrelease> \@kernel@before@para@before
+%<latexrelease> \hook_use:n {para/before}
+%<latexrelease> \group_begin:
+%<latexrelease> \tex_everypar:D {}
+%<latexrelease> \skip_zero:N \tex_parskip:D
+%<latexrelease> \tex_noindent:D
+%<latexrelease> \group_end:
+%<latexrelease> \tex_everypar:D{\g_@@_standard_everypar_tl}
+%<latexrelease> \@kernel@before@para@begin
+%<latexrelease> \hook_use:n {para/begin}
+%<latexrelease> \if_mode_horizontal: \else:
+%<latexrelease> \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{begin}{vertical} \fi:
+%<latexrelease> \@@_handle_indent:
+%<latexrelease>}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also have to add the \cs{everypar} toks register at the
+% end. In case of rollback this is already allocated and we have to
+% find out the correct number (hope this is correctly done)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\cs_set:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1#2#3#4#5 { }
+%<latexrelease>\tl_gput_right:Nx \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl {
+%<latexrelease> \exp_not:N \the
+%<latexrelease> \exp_not:N \toks
+%<latexrelease> \exp_after:wN \@@_tmp:w \token_to_meaning:N \everypar
+%<latexrelease> \c_space_tl
+%<latexrelease>}
+%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpictur.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpictur.dtx
index 453ec6149e3..926fd5c6924 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpictur.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpictur.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltplain.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltplain.dtx
index ee1cf0a1613..1bdff344f73 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltplain.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltplain.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltsect.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltsect.dtx
index 71ab1ee89dd..5a03fd49777 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltsect.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltsect.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltshipout.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltshipout.dtx
index 7aa07f754ba..1b3cabcfc86 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltshipout.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltshipout.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 2020-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 2020-2023
%% Frank Mittelbach, LaTeX Team
%%
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltspace.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltspace.dtx
index 30bda278fbf..672ab927292 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltspace.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltspace.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttab.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttab.dtx
index e32153f31c3..e76325d82ba 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttab.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttab.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttextcomp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttextcomp.dtx
index 8f5ec0d2002..3602e0a6b00 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttextcomp.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttextcomp.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2019-2022
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltthm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltthm.dtx
index d0d04d9669d..b321c7ac2b1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltthm.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltthm.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltvers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltvers.dtx
index eae29f0f014..da131765aca 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltvers.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltvers.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@
{2023-06-01}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<*2ekernel>
-\def\patch@level{-1}
+\def\patch@level{-2}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\development@branch@name}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.dtx
index 6863349be3d..78b6de4bcce 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxref.dtx
index 596eb2fd74d..dcfebf0e7e8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxref.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxref.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.dtx
index fb6c4746594..b91d3a6c441 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.ins
index 0fe55ed0392..1c5f6edcb92 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newdc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newdc.ins
index eeec6479ebb..277e8ea21f6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newdc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newdc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newlfont.dtx
index 86c0d47ab63..0b35eddd800 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newlfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newlfont.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.dtx
index 51d7834aa32..556ce5f76da 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.ins
index a181c619721..21a13f70a89 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/olddc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/olddc.ins
index 707fb207e6c..320b3a4b0ef 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/olddc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/olddc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/oldlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/oldlfont.dtx
index b7c9abc3eb4..33ae5e6fd9d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/oldlfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/oldlfont.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/preload.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/preload.dtx
index 3b75df38fdb..d26bdaa9ed1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/preload.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/preload.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.dtx
index 135c67bc0b2..bbbf71162ff 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.ins
index 16f60195e59..056816e99ef 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.dtx
index 5ea9e58d9c8..a918c337dd8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.ins
index 8c9862c2d54..3acb556b96a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
This is a generated file.
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.dtx
index ae4d4cd1f85..2b0049b6964 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.ins
index 5812ef2fd6b..8ccaf254d15 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+Copyright (C) 1993-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/tulm.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/tulm.ins
index a50060b2013..85970a51333 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/tulm.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/tulm.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 2016-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 2016-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ reports for it can be opened at https://latex-project.org/bugs.html
(but please observe conditions on bug reports sent to that address!)
-Copyright (C) 2016-2022
+Copyright (C) 2016-2023
The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
in this file.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/unpack.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/unpack.ins
index 21ba62a33a7..5baa2b5447c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/unpack.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/unpack.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
%% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
%% in this file.
%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.dtx
index a2b25fd3ab5..f1623ee0e6c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 1993-2022
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2023
% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx
index 23053a484ae..eb99fbd3a9d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/documentmetadata-support.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
%% File: documentmetadata-support.dtx
-% Copyright (C) 2021-2022 The LaTeX Project
+% Copyright (C) 2021-2023 The LaTeX Project
%
% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@
% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\documentmetadatasupportversion{1.0b}
-\def\documentmetadatasupportdate{2022-14-04}
+\def\documentmetadatasupportversion{1.0c}
+\def\documentmetadatasupportdate{2023-01-07}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -64,13 +64,19 @@
% While the underlying functionality is still under
% development (e.g., further keys will be added over time and keys
% marked temporary may vanish again) the code for
-% \cs{DocumentMetadata} is place in a separate bundle, so that it
+% \cs{DocumentMetadata} is placed in a separate bundle, so that it
% is easier to update it without the need to build a full \LaTeX{}
% release. Over time the functionality will move fully into the
% kernel.
+%
+% \cs{DocumentMetadata} also loads and activates
+% the new PDF management code from \pkg{pdfmanagement-testphase}.
+% As this forces the loading of the \pkg{l3backend} files, a backend
+% that can't be detected automatically like |dvipdfmx|,
+% must be set in the first \cs{DocumentMetadata}.
%
% From a process perspective \cs{DocumentMetadata} loads the
-% \pkg{pdfmanagement} code the first time it is called and then
+% \pkg{pdfmanagement-testphase} code the first time it is called and then
% redefines itself to only manage key/value pairs in case it is
% called more than once. In particular, this means that a document
% without a \cs{DocumentMetadata} declaration has no code available
@@ -84,10 +90,12 @@
%
%
% Currently the following keys are implemented for \cs{DocumentMetadata}:
+% \DescribeMkey{backend}
% \DescribeMkey{colorprofiles}
% \DescribeMkey{debug}
% \DescribeMkey{lang}
% \DescribeMkey{pdfstandard}
+% \DescribeMkey{xmp}
% \DescribeMkey{pdfversion}
% \DescribeMkey{testphase}
% \DescribeMkey{uncompress}
@@ -110,15 +118,34 @@
% \item[\texttt{pdfstandard}] Choice key to set the pdf standard.
% Currently |A-1b|, |A-2a|, |A-2b|, |A-2u|, |A-3a|, |A-3b|, |A-3u| and |A-4| are accepted as
% values. The casing is irrelevant, |a-1b| works too.
-% The underlying code to ensure the requirements (as far as they
-% can be ensured) is still incomplete, but a color profile is included and the
-% \texttt{/OutputIntent} is set. The |u| variants for example do not force unicode,
-% but they will pass the information to hyperref and hyperxmp. The |a| variants
-% do \emph{not} enforce (or even test) a tagged pdf yet. The |A-4| support is
-% currently incomplete.
+% Note that using these
+% key doesn't mean that the document actually follows the standard. \LaTeX{}
+% can neither ensure nor check all requirements of a standard, and not everything
+% it can do theoretically has already been implemented.
+% When setting an A-standard a color profile is included and the
+% \texttt{/OutputIntent} is set and javascript action in hyperref are suppressed.
+% The |u| variants do not enforce unicode,
+% but they will pass the information to hyperref. The |a| variants
+% do \emph{not} enforce (or even test) a tagged pdf yet.
+%
+% Starting with version 0.95s of \pkg{pdfmanagement-testphase}
+% it is also possible to use the values
+% |X-4|, |X-4p|, |X-5g|, |X-5n|, |X-5pg|, |X-6|, |X-6n|, |X-6p|, |UA-1| for
+% a PDF/X and PDF/UA standard. These keys currently set \emph{only} the relevant
+% XMP-metadata.
+%
+% |pdfstandard| can be used more than once to set overlapping standards, e.g:\\
+% |pdfstandard=A-2b,pdfstandard=X-4,pdfstandard=UA-1|
+%
+% If XMP-metadata are added (see the following key \texttt{xmp}
+% the needed conformance marker for the standards are set.
+%
% More information can be found in the documentation
-% of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}.
+% of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}.
%
+% \item[\texttt{xmp}] A boolean, if set to false no XMP metadata are added to the PDF.
+% The initial value is true. Details are described in the documentation of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}.
+%
% \item[\texttt{colorprofiles}] This allows to load icc-colorprofiles. Details
% are described in the documentation of \pkg{l3pdfmeta}.
%
@@ -137,6 +164,16 @@
% additionally activate tagging of paragraphs with
% |\tagpdfsetup{paratagging}|. In the upcoming months it will
% also enable automatic tagging of other basic document elements.
+% \item[\texttt{new-or-1}] This patches a few commands related
+% to the output routine. The patches are needed for the tagging
+% of paragraphs, for the tagging of header and footer and
+% to allow the PDF management to insert code which avoids that
+% links happening at page breaks spills into the header and footer.
+% This code is automatically loaded if the \texttt{testphase} values
+% \texttt{phase-I}, \texttt{phase-II} or \texttt{new-or} are used.%
+% \item[\texttt{new-or}] This loads more changes to the output routine required for the
+% tagging. It is not compatible with every class! The code is also loaded by the
+% \texttt{phase-II} value.
% \end{description}
% The |testphase| key can only be used in the first \cs{DocumentMetadata}.
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-amsmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-amsmath.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e1f95730fae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-amsmath.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: latex-lab-amsmath.dtx
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2022,2023 The LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-amsmath.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-amsmath} code\thanks{}}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand\fmi[1]{\begin{quote} TODO: \itshape #1\end{quote}}
+% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}}
+% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}}
+% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file implements adaptations to the \pkg{amsmath} package needed for
+% the tagging project.
+%
+% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=math>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{File declaration}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-amsmath.ltx}
+ [2023-01-05 v0.1a amsmath adaptions]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Tagpdf support}
+% To make the code independent from tagging being loaded and active
+% we load the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{tagpdf-base}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\cs{intertext}}
+% The \cs{intertext} command errors with active tagging as it is processed twice
+% which leads to duplicated structures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{package/amsmath/after}
+ {
+ \def\intertext@{%
+ \def\intertext##1{%
+ \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi
+ \noalign{%
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \vbox{
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Stop tagging when measuring:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi
+ \normalbaselines
+ \ifdim\linewidth=\columnwidth
+ \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End the previous mc:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are already in a par so we change now to Span:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span}%
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restart the MC
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}%
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip%
+ }%
+ }}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1a1dce3a648
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,3821 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx (C) Copyright 2021-2023 LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\usepackage{amstext}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+
+\usepackage{todonotes}
+
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+
+\def\ltblocksversion{v0.8a}
+\def\ltblocksdate{2023/03/08}
+
+%
+% \title{Prototype reimplementation of \LaTeXe{}'s block environments using templates}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial reimplementation of lists done by Bruno
+% Le Floch, generalized second version with tagging support by Frank Mittelbach.}}
+% \date{\ltblocksversion\ \ltblocksdate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+%
+% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}}
+% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}}
+% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class
+% customizations}}
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\struct[1]{\texttt{<#1>}}
+%
+% \NewDocElement[envlike, idxtype=objecttype, idxgroup=object types,
+% printtype=\textit{objecttype}] {ObjectType}{objecttype}
+%
+% \NewDocElement[envlike, idxtype=template, idxgroup=templates,
+% printtype=\textit{templ.}] {Template}{template}
+%
+% \NewDocElement[envlike, idxtype=instance, idxgroup=instances,
+% printtype=\textit{inst.}] {Instance}{instance}
+%
+%
+% \newcommand\valuefrom[1]{\textrm{value from }\texttt{#1}}
+% \newcommand\key[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+%
+% \NewDocumentCommand\fmi{sO{}m}
+% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,#2]{#3}}^^A
+% {\todo[#2]{#3}}}
+%
+% \NewDocumentCommand\ufi{sO{}m}
+% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,#2]{UFi:#3}}^^A
+% {\todo[#2]{UFi:#3}}}
+% \makeatletter
+% \renewenvironment{TemplateInterfaceDescription}[1]
+% {
+% \subsubsection{The~object~type~`#1'}
+% \begingroup
+% \@beginparpenalty\@M
+% \description
+% \def\TemplateArgument##1##2{\item[Arg:~##1]##2\par}
+% \def\TemplateSemantics
+% {
+% \enddescription\endgroup
+% \subsubsection*{Semantics:}
+% }
+% }
+% {
+% \par\bigskip
+% }
+% \renewenvironment{TemplateDescription}[2]
+% {\subsubsection{The \texttt{#1} template `#2'}^^A
+% \paragraph*{Attributes:}^^A
+% \begingroup
+% \@beginparpenalty\@M
+% \description
+% \def\TemplateKey##1##2##3##4{^^A
+% \item[\texttt{##1}~(\textit{\mdseries##2})]##3^^A
+% \ifx\TemplateKey##4\TemplateKey\else
+% \hfill\penalty500\hbox{}\hfill Default:~\texttt{##4}^^A
+% \nobreak\hskip-\parfillskip\hskip0pt\relax
+% \fi
+% \par
+% }^^A
+% \def\TemplateSemantics{^^A
+% \enddescription\endgroup
+% \paragraph*{Semantics~\&~Comments:}^^A
+% }^^A
+% }
+% { \par \bigskip }
+% \makeatother
+%
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+% \medskip
+%
+%
+% \begin{documentation}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% The list implementation in \LaTeXe{} serves a dual purpose: it
+% implements real lists such as \env{itemize} or \env{enumerate},
+% but it is also used as the basis for vertical blocks, i.e., to specify
+% the vertical spacing and paragraph handling after such block, e.g.,
+% in environments like \env{center}, \env{quote}, \env{verbatim}, or in
+% the theorem environments. They are all implemented as
+% \enquote{trivial} lists with a single (hidden) item.
+%
+% While this was convenient to get a consistent layout using a single
+% implementation it is not adequate if it comes to interpreting the
+% structure of a document, because environments based on \env{trivlist}
+% should not advertise themselves as being a \enquote{list} --- after all,
+% from a semantic point of view they aren't lists.
+%
+% The approach taking here is therefore to offer separate object
+% types: \xt{block} (horizontally or vertically oriented data that
+% needs some handling at the start and the end), \xt{para} (that deals
+% with different paragraph layouts), \xt{list} (that handles list
+% related parameters, and \xt{item} (for item layouts and handling), to address
+% the independent aspects and also offer the object type \xt{blockenv}
+% that ties them together as necessary.
+%
+% For example, a \env{quote} environment would make use of a (display)
+% \xt{block} and some \xt{para} handling while an standard
+% \env{enumerate} would make use of a display \xt{block}, a \xt{list},
+% and an \xt{item} and \xt{para} instance.
+% An inline list (like \env{enumerate*} from the \pkg{enumitem}
+% package) would be using the same \xt{list} instance but a different
+% (horizontally oriented) \xt{block}.
+%
+%
+% \section{Object types and templates for blocks and lists}
+%
+% \subsection{Object types}
+%
+% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{block}
+% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default block parameters}
+% \TemplateSemantics
+% Handle the layout aspects of a block of data. In case of a
+% \enquote{display} block (i.e., vertically oriented) the spacing
+% and page breaking as well as the handling if the block starts a
+% paragraph or ends one, that is, if text is immediately following
+% the block without being separated by an empty line, then this
+% text is considered to be in the same paragraph as the block.
+%
+% In case of a horizontally oriented block it covers any special
+% handling at the start and end of the block, e.g, extra spacing,
+% prohibitying or encuraging line breaks, and so forth.
+% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription}
+%
+% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{para}
+% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters}
+% \TemplateSemantics
+% Sets up paragraph-specific parameters for H\&J, e.g., to
+% implement justification variations, the behavior of \verb=\\=
+% etc. The instances are used in higher-level templates, e.g., in a
+% \xt{block}.
+% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription}
+%
+% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{list}
+% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters}
+% \TemplateSemantics
+% Handle the aspects related to list design, e.g., the use and
+% formatting of counters, etc.
+%
+% Note that this does not cover block-related aspects, i.e., a list
+% instance could be used both for a display list or for an inline line.
+% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription}
+%
+% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{item}
+% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters}
+% \TemplateSemantics
+% A sub-type used as part of \xt{list} to easily cover alternative layout
+% for list items.
+% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription}
+%
+%
+% \begin{TemplateInterfaceDescription}{blockenv}
+% \TemplateArgument{1}{key/value list to alter the default item parameters}
+% \TemplateSemantics
+% This object type is used to implement document-level
+% environments. It defines a \xt{block} instance to handle the
+% layout at the \enquote{edge} of the environment data, possibly
+% some paragraph setup through a \xt{para} instance, potentially an
+% \enquote{inner} instance for more complicated environments (such
+% as lists), and possibly some additional setup code for certain
+% environments.
+%
+% It also defines how the \xt{blockenv} behaves with respect to
+% nesting, e.g., does it change when nested and if so how many
+% levels of nesting are supported, etc.
+%
+% Finally, the object type defines how it appears in a tagged PDF
+% document, what tag names are used, how they are rolemapped and
+% whether it adds additional attributes, etc.
+% \end{TemplateInterfaceDescription}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Templates}
+%
+%
+% \begin{TemplateDescription}{blockenv}{display}
+%
+% \TemplateKey{env-name}{tokenlist}
+% {Name of the environment used only in tracing}{}
+% \TemplateKey{tag-name}{tokenlist}
+% {Name of the tag in the PDF. If not explicitly given
+% the name is defined by the \key{tagging-recipe}}{}
+% \TemplateKey{tag-class}{tokenlist}
+% {An explicit tag class attribute}{}
+% \TemplateKey{tagging-recipe}{tokenlist}
+% {Defines the way tagging is done. Currently the values
+% \texttt{basic}, \texttt{standard}, and \texttt{list}
+% are supported}{standard}
+% \TemplateKey{level-increase}{boolean}{Does this \xt{blockenv}
+% increase the block level if it is nested in an outer block?}{true}
+% \TemplateKey{setup-code}{tokenlist}
+% {Initial setup code. This is
+% executed after legacy defaults (from \cs{@listi},
+% \cs{@listii}, etc.) are used but before the block instance is called}{}
+% \TemplateKey{block-instance}{tokenlist}{Part of the name of the
+% \xt{block} instance that is called. The full name has
+% a \texttt{-}\meta{level} appended}{displayblock}
+% \TemplateKey{para-instance}{tokenlist}{}{}
+% \TemplateKey{inner-level-counter}{tokenlist}{Name of an existing (!) counter
+% that is incremented and used to determine final name
+% of the \key{inner-instance} or empty if always the
+% same inner instance should be used}{}
+% \TemplateKey{max-inner-levels}{tokenlist}{Maximum number of nested
+% environments of this kind. Only relevant if there is a
+% \key{inner-level-counter} specified}{4}
+% \TemplateKey{inner-instance-type}{tokenlist}{Opject type of the
+% inner instance}{list}
+% \TemplateKey{inner-instance}{tokenlist}{Name of the inner instance
+% (if any).}{}
+% \TemplateKey{para-flattened}{boolean}{\emph{describe}}{false}
+% \TemplateKey{final-code}{tokenlist}{Final setup code}{\cs{ignorespaces}}
+%
+% \TemplateSemantics
+%
+% This \xt{blockenv} template supports the legacy list setting that
+% are found in many document classes in the macros \cs{@listi},
+% \cs{@listii}, up to \cs{@listvi}. It also uses the counter
+% \cs{@listdepth} to track nesting of block, again mainly to
+% support legacy setups (internally it gives it a more appropriate
+% name but it remains accessible through the \LaTeXe{} name).
+%
+%
+% It first checks that nothing is too deeply nested.
+% If the level should increase then the increments the
+% \cs{@listdepth} counter and
+% calls the corresponding \cs{@list...} macro to update the legacy
+% defaults. If \key{level-increase} is set to false this is bypassed.
+%
+% It then sets up the
+% tagging via the \key{tagging-recipe} setting and executes any
+% code in \key{setup-code}.
+%
+% Afterwards it calls the appropriate \xt{block} instance based on
+% \key{block-instance} and current level, e.g.,
+% \texttt{displayblock-1}. Then it sets up paragraph parameters if
+% a \key{para-instance} was specified (otherwise they stay as
+% they are).
+%
+% If a \key{inner-instance} was specified this is called next,
+% or more precisely: if no \key{inner-level-counter} was
+% specified the instance \key{inner-instance} is
+% called.
+%
+% Otherwise, the \key{inner-level-counter} is incremented and the
+% instance with the name
+% \key{inner-instance}\texttt{-}\key{inner-level-counter} is
+% called.
+%
+% Finally, the \key{final-code} is executed (by default
+% \cs{ignorespaces}).
+%
+%
+% \end{TemplateDescription}
+%
+% The maximum number of \xt{blockenv}s that can be nested into each
+% other is is restricted by the \LaTeX{} counter
+% \texttt{maxblocklevels} with a default value of \texttt{6}. If this
+% value is increased then it is necessary to provide additional
+% instances, e.g., \texttt{displayblock-7}, etc. Decreasing is, of
+% course, always possible, then some of the instances defined are not
+% used and instead the user gets an error that there is too much
+% nesting going on.
+%
+% If the key \key{level-increase} is set to \texttt{false} then such
+% an environment doesn't alter the nesting level and therefore you can
+% nest those environments as often as you like (a typical example
+% would be \env{flushleft} anywhere in the nesting hierarchy, that
+% would have no effect on hitting the boundary).
+%
+%
+% \begin{TemplateDescription}{block}{display}
+%
+% \TemplateKey{heading}{tokenlist}{\emph{not really used yet}}{}
+% \TemplateKey{beginsep}{skip}{}{\cs{topsep}}
+% \TemplateKey{begin-par-skip}{skip}{}{\cs{partopsep}}
+% \TemplateKey{par-skip}{skip}{}{\cs{parsep}}
+% \TemplateKey{end-skip}{skip}{}{\valuefrom{beginsep}}
+% \TemplateKey{end-par-skip}{skip}{}{\valuefrom{begin-par-skip}}
+% \TemplateKey{beginpenalty}{integer}{}{\cs{@beginparpenalty}}
+% \TemplateKey{endpenalty}{integer}{}{\cs{@endparpenalty}}
+% \TemplateKey{leftmargin}{length}{}{\cs{leftmargin}}
+% \TemplateKey{rightmargin}{length}{}{\cs{rightmargin}}
+% \TemplateKey{parindent}{length}{}{\cs{listparindent}}
+%
+% \TemplateSemantics
+%
+% The idea of a \key{heading} key needs some further
+% thoughts. Maybe instead the object type should accept a second
+% argument and receive input for such a headding from the document
+% level instead.
+%
+% The names of the keys need further thoughts and some
+% decision. Right now it is a mixture of those with hyphens and
+% those that match legacy register names (the way \pkg{enumitem}
+% did its keys).
+%
+% Also \key{parindent} conflicts with \key{indent-width}!
+%
+% \end{TemplateDescription}
+%
+%
+% \begin{TemplateDescription}{para}{std}
+%
+% \TemplateKey{indent-width}{length}{}{\cs{parindent}}
+% \TemplateKey{start-skip}{skip}{}{0pt}
+% \TemplateKey{left-skip}{skip}{}{0pt}
+% \TemplateKey{right-skip}{skip}{}{0pt}
+% \TemplateKey{end-skip}{skip}{}{\cs{@flushglue}}
+% \TemplateKey{fixed-word-spaces}{boolean}{}{false}
+% \TemplateKey{final-hyphen-demerits}{integer}{}{5000}
+% \TemplateKey{cr-cmd}{tokenlist}{}{\cs{@normalcr}}
+% \TemplateKey{para-class}{tokenlist}{}{justify}
+%
+% \TemplateSemantics
+%
+%
+% \end{TemplateDescription}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{TemplateDescription}{list}{std}
+%
+% \TemplateKey{counter}{tokenlist}
+% {Counter name to be used in a numbered list or empty,
+% if the list is unnumbered}{}
+% \TemplateKey{item-label}{tokenlist}
+% {Label \enquote{string} for a fixed label or as
+% generated from the current \key{counter} value}{}
+% \TemplateKey{start}{integer}
+% {Start value for the counter if the list is numbered,
+% otherwise irrelevant}{1}
+% \TemplateKey{resume}{boolean}
+% {Should a numbered list be resumed from the last instance?}{false}
+% \TemplateKey{item-instance}{instance}
+% {Instance of type \texttt{item} to be used to format
+% the label string}{basic}
+% \TemplateKey{item-skip}{skip}{The space in front of an item in the
+% list.\fmi{May need to be on a different template level}}{\cs{itemsep}}
+% \TemplateKey{item-indent}{length}{Horizontal displacement of the item.}{0pt}
+% \TemplateKey{item-penalty}{integer}
+% {Penalty for breaking before an
+% item (except the first)}{\cs{@itempenalty}}
+% \TemplateKey{label-width}{length}
+% {Width reserved for the formatted item label}{\cs{labelwidth}}
+% \TemplateKey{label-sep}{length}
+% {Horizontal separation between label and following text}{\cs{labelsep}}
+% \TemplateKey{legacy-support}{boolean}
+% {Is formatting the label via \cs{makelabel} supported?}{false}
+%
+% \TemplateSemantics
+%
+%
+% \end{TemplateDescription}
+%
+%
+% \begin{TemplateDescription}{item}{std}
+%
+% \TemplateKey{counter-label}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{\cs{arabic}\{\#1\}}
+% \TemplateKey{counter-ref}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{\valuefrom{counter-label}}
+% \TemplateKey{label-ref}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{\#1}
+% \TemplateKey{label-autoref}{function{1}}{\emph{unused}}{item~\#1}
+% \TemplateKey{label-format}{function{1}}
+% {Formatting of the label, questionable the way it is used}{\#1}
+% \TemplateKey{label-strut}{boolean}{Add a \cs{strut} to the label?}{false}
+% \TemplateKey{label-align}{choice}
+% {Supported values \texttt{left},\texttt{center},
+% \texttt{right}, and \texttt{parleft}. \emph{Only partly implemented}}{right}
+% \TemplateKey{label-boxed}{boolean}
+% {Should the label be boxed?}{true}
+% \TemplateKey{next-line}{boolean}{}{false}
+% \TemplateKey{text-font}{tokenlist}{\emph{unused}}{}
+% \TemplateKey{compatibility}{boolean}{}{true}
+%
+% \TemplateSemantics
+%
+% This template is only rudimentary implemented at the moment. It
+% probably needs other keys and the existing ones need a proper
+% implementation.
+%
+% \end{TemplateDescription}
+%
+%
+% \section{Tagging support}
+%
+% \subsection{Paragraph tags}
+%
+% Paragraphs in \LaTeX{} can be nested, e.g., you can have a paragraph
+% containing a display quote, which in turn consists of more than one
+% (sub)paragraph, followed by some more text which all belongs to the
+% same outer paragraph.
+%
+% In the PDF model and in the HTML model that is not supported --- a
+% limitation that conflicts with real live, given that such
+% constructs are quite normal in spoken and written language.
+%
+% The approach we take to resolve this is to model such \enquote{big}
+% paragraphs with a structure named \struct{text-unit} and use \struct{text} (rollmapped to \struct{P})
+% only for (portions of) the actual paragraph text in a way that the
+% \struct{text}s are not nested. As a result we have for a simple
+% paragraph the structures
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill
+% \> \struct{text-unit}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text}\\
+% \>\>\> The paragraph text \ldots\\
+% \>\> \struct{/text}\\
+% \> \struct{/text-unit}
+% \end{tabbing}
+% The \struct{text-unit} structure is rollmapped to \struct{Part} or possibly to
+% \struct{Div} so we get a valid PDF, but processors who care can identify
+% the complete paragraphs by looking for \struct{text-unit} tags.
+%
+% In the case of an element, such as a display quote or a display list
+% inside the paragraph, we then have
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill
+% \> \struct{text-unit}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text}\\
+% \>\>\> The paragraph text before the display element \ldots\\
+% \>\> \struct{/text}\\
+% \>\> \struct{display element structure}\\
+% \>\>\> Content of the display structure possiblly involving inner \struct{text-unit} tags\\
+% \>\> \struct{/display element structure}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text}\\
+% \>\>\> \ldots{} continuing the outer paragraph text\\
+% \>\> \struct{/text}\\
+% \> \struct{/text-unit}
+% \end{tabbing}
+% In other words such a display block is always embedded in a
+% \struct{text-unit} structure, possibly preceded by a \struct{text}\ldots\struct{/text} block
+% and possibly followed by one, though both such blocks are optional.
+%
+% Thus an \env{itemize} environment that has some introductory text
+% but no text immediately following the list
+% would be tagged as follows:
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill
+% \> \struct{text-unit}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text}\\
+% \>\>\> The intro text for the \env{itemize} environment \ldots\\
+% \>\> \struct{/text}\\
+% \>\> \struct{itemize}\\
+% \>\>\> \struct{LI}\\
+% \>\>\>\> \struct{Lbl} label \struct{/Lbl}\\
+% \>\>\>\> \struct{LBody}\\
+% \>\>\>\>\> The text of the first item involving \struct{text-unit} as necessary \ldots\\
+% \>\>\>\> \struct{/LBody}\\
+% \>\>\> \struct{/LI}\\
+% \>\>\> \struct{LI}\\
+% \>\>\>\> The second item \ldots{}\\
+% \>\>\> \struct{/LI}\\
+% \>\>\> \ldots{} further items \ldots\\
+% \>\> \struct{/itemize}\\
+% \> \struct{/text-unit}
+% \end{tabbing}
+% The \struct{itemize} is rollmapped to \struct{L}.
+%
+% For some display blocks, such as centered text, we use a simpler
+% strategy. Such blocks still ensure that they are inside a \struct{text-unit}
+% structure but their body uses simple \struct{text} blocks and not
+% \struct{text-unit}\struct{text} inside, e.g., the input
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% This is a paragraph with some
+% \begin{center}
+% centered lines
+%
+% with a paragraph break between them
+% \end{center}
+% followed by some more text.
+% \end{verbatim}
+% will be tagged as follows:
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% \hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\=\hspace*{1em}\= \kill
+% \> \struct{text-unit}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text}\\
+% \>\>\> This is a paragraph with some\\
+% \>\> \struct{/text}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text /O /Layout /TextAlign/Center}\\
+% \>\>\> centered lines\\
+% \>\> \struct{/text}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text /O /Layout /TextAlign/Center}\\
+% \>\>\> with a paragraph break between them\\
+% \>\> \struct{/text}\\
+% \>\> \struct{text}\\
+% \>\>\> followed by some more text.\\
+% \> \struct{/text-unit}
+% \end{tabbing}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Tagging recipes}
+%
+% There are a number of different tagging recipes that implement
+% different tagging approaches. They are selected through the
+% \key{tagging-recipe} of the \xt{blockenv} template. Currently the
+% following values are implemented:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\texttt{basic}]
+% This recipe does the following:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% Ensure that the \xt{blockenv} is inside a \struct{text-unit}
+% structure, if necessary, start one.
+% \item
+% If inside a \struct{text-unit}\struct{text}, then close the \struct{/text} but
+% leave the \struct{text-unit} open.
+%
+% \item
+% Text inside the body of the environment starts with
+% \struct{text-unit}\struct{text} if \key{para-flattened} is set to \texttt{false},
+% otherwise just with \struct{text}.
+%
+% \item
+% At the end of the environment close \struct{/text} and possibly an
+% inner \struct{/text-unit} if open.
+%
+% \item
+% Then look if the environment is followed by an empty line
+% (\cs{par}). If so, close the outer \struct{/text-unit} and start any
+% following text with \struct{text-unit}\struct{text}. Otherwise,
+% don't and following text restarts with a just a \struct{text} (and no
+% paragraph indentation)
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+% \item[\texttt{standard}]
+% This recipe is like the \texttt{basic} one as far as handling
+% \struct{text-unit} and \struct{text} is concerned. In addition
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% it starts an inner tagging structure (i.e., which is therefore a
+% child of the outer \struct{text-unit}).
+% \item
+% By default this structure is a \struct{Figure} unless overwritten
+% by the key \key{tag-name}. If that key is used, a suitable
+% rollmap needs to be provided for the name given.
+% \item
+% At the end of the environment that inner structure is closed
+% again so that we are back on the \struct{text-unit} level from the outside.
+% \item
+% Then the lookahead for an empty line is done as described previously.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+%
+% \item[\texttt{list}]
+% This recipe is like the \texttt{standard} one except that
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% the inner structure is a list (\struct{L}).
+% \item
+% Furthermore everything is set up so that we have list items
+% (\struct{LI}) with suitable substructures (\struct{Lbl} for the item
+% labels and \struct{LBody} for the item bodies).
+% \item
+% If the key \key{tag-name} is specified, this is used as the tag
+% name for the whole list instead of \struct{L}. Of course, it
+% should then have a suitable rollmap.
+% \item
+% If the key \key{tag-class} is specified then this is used as the
+% class attribute. Again, this requires a suitable setup on the outside.
+% \item
+% At the end of the environment the \struct{/LBody}, \struct{/LI}, and
+% \struct{/L} (or the tag name used) are closed.
+% \item
+% Then the lookahead for an empty line is done as described previously.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \end{documentation}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{implementation}
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%<@@=block>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesPackage {latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging}
+ [\ltblocksdate\space \ltblocksversion\space
+ blockenv implementation]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We make use of templates:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{xtemplate}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Generell kernel changes, also loaded by the sec and toc code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-kernel-changes}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ufi{this variable(s) must be declared:}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_item_align_tl
+\tl_new:N\l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+% \subsection{Handling \cs{par} after the end of the list}
+%
+% An empty line (or a \cs{par}) after a list has semantic meaning as
+% it defines whether then following text is logically within the same
+% paragraph as the list (no empty line) or whether it starts a new
+% paragraph and the paragraph containing the list ends at the end of
+% the list (empty line after the list).
+% This is handled by \LaTeX{} using a legacy flag called
+% \texttt{@endpe} and set of commands inside the
+% generic \cs{end} (calling \cs{@doendpe}) and as part of the list
+% environments identifying themselves as \enquote{paragraph ending
+% environments} (by setting this flag).
+%
+% For the reimplementation of the list environments including support
+% of tagging we need to augment that mechanism slightly and add some
+% kernel hook(s) to add the tagging code if needed.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@doendpe}
+% The original \LaTeXe{} command is augmented to allow for tagging.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@doendpe{\@endpetrue
+ \def\par
+ {
+ \@restorepar
+ \clubpenalty\@clubpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point we add the tagging code that closes an open
+% \struct{text-unit}, \struct{text} tag combination,
+% if necessary:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_displayblock_doendpe:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The standard \cs{par} command (\cs{par_end:}) acts on
+% \texttt{@endpe} and attempts to close a still open \texttt{text-unit}
+% and this would be wrong if it was already closed above. So we
+% have to reset the switch to false first.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@endpefalse
+ \everypar{}
+ \par
+ }
+ \everypar{{\setbox\z@\lastbox}
+ \everypar{}
+ \@endpefalse
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% By default we don't do any tagging:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_doendpe: \prg_do_nothing:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The flag itself should be set globally not locally.\fmi{verify
+% that this claim is actually correct!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@endpetrue {\global\let\if@endpe\iftrue}
+\def\@endpefalse{\global\let\if@endpe\iffalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Object and template interfaces}
+%
+%
+% \begin{objecttype}{blockenv, block, para, list, item}
+% All object types expect a single
+% key--value argument used to tweak template parameters specific to a
+% given use in the document. This section is devoted to template
+% interfaces, and the template code is covered later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareObjectType{blockenv}{1}
+\DeclareObjectType{block}{1}
+\DeclareObjectType{para}{1}
+\DeclareObjectType{list}{1}
+\DeclareObjectType{item}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{objecttype}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{blockenv display}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateInterface{blockenv}{display}{1}
+{
+ env-name : tokenlist ,
+ tag-name : tokenlist ,
+ tag-class : tokenlist ,
+ tagging-recipe : tokenlist = standard,
+ level-increase : boolean = true ,
+ setup-code : tokenlist ,
+ block-instance : tokenlist = displayblock ,
+ para-instance : tokenlist ,
+ inner-level-counter : tokenlist,
+ max-inner-levels : tokenlist = 4,
+ inner-instance-type : tokenlist = list ,
+ inner-instance : tokenlist ,
+ para-flattened : boolean = false ,
+ final-code : tokenlist = \ignorespaces ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{block display}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateInterface{block}{display}{1}
+{
+ heading : tokenlist = , %??
+ beginsep : skip = \topsep ,
+ begin-par-skip : skip = \partopsep ,
+ par-skip : skip = \parsep ,
+ end-skip : skip = \KeyValue{beginsep} , % conflict with name below
+ end-par-skip : skip = \KeyValue{begin-par-skip} ,
+ beginpenalty : integer = \UseName{@beginparpenalty} ,
+ endpenalty : integer = \UseName{@endparpenalty} ,
+ leftmargin : length = \leftmargin ,
+ rightmargin : length = \rightmargin ,
+ parindent : length = \listparindent ,
+% font : tokenlist % maybe add? (or more general for fonts and color)
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{para std}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateInterface{para}{std}{1}
+{
+ indent-width : length = \parindent ,
+ start-skip : skip = 0pt ,
+ left-skip : skip = 0pt ,
+ right-skip : skip = 0pt ,
+ end-skip : skip = \@flushglue ,
+ fixed-word-spaces : boolean = false ,
+ final-hyphen-demerits : integer = 5000 ,
+ cr-cmd : tokenlist = \@normalcr ,
+ para-class : tokenlist = justify ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{list std}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateInterface{list}{std}{1} % optional
+{
+ counter : tokenlist = ,
+ item-label : tokenlist = ,
+ start : integer = 1 ,
+ resume : boolean = false ,
+ item-instance : instance{item} = basic ,
+ item-skip : skip = \itemsep ,
+ item-penalty : integer = \UseName{@itempenalty} ,
+ item-indent : length = 0pt , % was \itemindent
+ label-width : length = \labelwidth ,
+ label-sep : length = \labelsep ,
+ legacy-support : boolean = false ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{item std}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateInterface{item}{std}{1}
+ {
+ counter-label : function{1} = \arabic{#1} ,
+ counter-ref : function{1} = \KeyValue{counter-label} ,
+ label-ref : function{1} = #1 ,
+ label-autoref : function{1} = item~#1 ,
+ label-format : function{1} = #1 ,
+ label-strut : boolean = false ,
+ label-align : choice {left,center,right,parleft} = right ,
+ label-boxed : boolean = true ,
+ next-line : boolean = false ,
+ text-font : tokenlist ,
+ compatibility : boolean = true ,
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Useful helper commands}
+%
+% This section collects \pkg{expl3} commands that will be useful.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_skip_set_to_last:N,\@@_skip_remove_last:}
+% Set a skiip register to the value of an immediately preceding
+% skip or zero if there was none
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_skip_set_to_last:N #1 {
+ \skip_set:Nn #1 { \tex_lastskip:D }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Remove a skip previous skip if it is directly in front (not
+% allowed in unrestricted vertical mode).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_skip_remove_last: \tex_unskip:D
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tl_if_novalue:nTF}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_novalue:nTF { o }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tag_if_active:T}
+% If tagging support is not loaded then we shouldn't try to execute
+% any tagging related commands. Eventually this can go once the
+% basic support is available in the kernel.
+% \fmi{can vanish one day}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_if_exist:NF \tag_if_active:T
+ { \cs_new_eq:NN \tag_if_active:T \use_none:n }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Debugging}
+%
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_debug_bool}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \g_@@_debug_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_debug:n,\@@_debug_typeout:n}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_debug:n \use_none:n
+\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_debug_typeout:n \use_none:n
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\block_debug_on:,\block_debug_off:,
+% \@@_debug_gset:}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \block_debug_on:
+ {
+ \bool_gset_true:N \g_@@_debug_bool
+ \@@_debug_gset:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \block_debug_off:
+ {
+ \bool_gset_false:N \g_@@_debug_bool
+ \@@_debug_gset:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_debug_gset:
+ {
+ \cs_gset_protected:Npx \@@_debug:n ##1
+ { \bool_if:NT \g_@@_debug_bool {##1} }
+ \cs_gset_protected:Npx \@@_debug_typeout:n ##1
+ { \bool_if:NT \g_@@_debug_bool { \typeout{==>~ ##1} } }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DebugBlocksOn,\DebugBlocksOff}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \DebugBlocksOn { \block_debug_on: }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \DebugBlocksOff { \block_debug_off: }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DebugBlocksOff
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Implementation of the document-level block environments}
+%
+% Most such environments are pretty simple: they take an option
+% argument and call a \texttt{blockenv} instance to do the work. At
+% the end of environment we call \cs{endblockenv} to finish.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Displayblock environments}
+%
+%
+% There are two basic block environment which are similar to
+% \LaTeXe{}'s \env{trivlist} except that there aren't degenerated
+% lists and thus have no hidden \cs{item} inside.
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{displayblock}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NewDocumentEnvironment{displayblock}{ !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{displayblock} {#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{displayblockflattened}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NewDocumentEnvironment{displayblockflattened}{ !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{displayblockflattened} {#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{center,flushleft,flushright}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{center} { !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{center}{#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{flushright} { !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{flushright}{#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{flushleft} { !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{flushleft}{#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Display quote environments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quote,quotation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{quote}{ !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{quote} {#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{quotation}{ !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{quotation} {#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Verbatim environments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{verbatim,verbatim*}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{verbatim}{ !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{verbatim} {#1}
+ \@xverbatim
+ }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{verbatim*}{ !O{} }
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{verbatim} {#1}
+ \@setupverbvisiblespace\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
+ \@sxverbatim
+ }
+ { \endblockenv }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+% \paragraph{Helper commands for verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\legacyverbatimsetup}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=>
+\def\legacyverbatimsetup{%
+ \language\l@nohyphenation
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \def\par{%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \leavevmode \null \@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
+ \fi}%
+ \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
+ \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs
+ \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {codeline}
+ \tagtool{paratag=Code}% oder faster: \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl{Code}
+ \@setupverbinvisiblespace
+ \frenchspacing \@vobeyspaces
+}
+%<@@=block>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setupverbinvisiblespace}
+% In the \pdfTeX{} engine we need to use \cs{pdffakespace} chars
+% for the invisible spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\@setupverbinvisiblespace{}
+\tag_if_active:T {
+ \bool_if:NF\g__tag_mode_lua_bool
+ {
+ \renewcommand\@setupverbinvisiblespace{\def\@xobeysp{\nobreakspace\pdffakespace}}
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Standard list environments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{itemize,enumerate,description}
+%
+% For the standard lists everything is managed by the blockenv instance.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{itemize}{!O{}}
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{itemize} {#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{enumerate}{!O{}}
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{enumerate} {#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{description}{!O{}}
+ { \UseInstance{blockenv}{description} {#1} }
+ { \endblockenv }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{list}
+%
+% The legacy 2e list environment is more complicated as we have to get the
+% extra arguments accounted for.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{list}{O{} m m }
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We do this by storing them away and then call the list
+% instance. Inside this instance the \texttt{setup-code} key
+% contains \cs{legacylistsetupcode}, which makes use of the stored values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nn \@itemlabel {#2}
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl {#3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \UseInstance{blockenv}{list} {#1}
+ }
+ { \endblockenv }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Again something that should probably elsewhere: the rolemapping.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T {
+ \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=list,role=L}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_env_params_tl}
+% Declare the variable for the parameter argument; \cs{@itemlabel}
+% is already declared in \LaTeXe{}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_env_params_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\legacylistsetupcode}
+%
+% And here is the extra code for use in the list instance setup
+% inside the key \texttt{setup-code}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \legacylistsetupcode {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Reset values to defaults:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dim_zero:N \listparindent
+ \dim_zero:N \rightmargin
+ \dim_zero:N \itemindent
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% By default a \env{list} environment is not numbered:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nn \@listctr {}
+ \legacy_if_set_false:n { @nmbrlist } % needed if lists are nested
+% \end{macrocode}
+% By default there is a simple definition for \cs{makelabel}. It can be
+% overwritten in the second mandatory argument to the list
+% environment (stored in \cs{l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl}) and
+% is used if the instance sets the compatibility key to true.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\makelabel\@mklab % TODO: customize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we use the argument with parameter settings to update some or
+% all of the above defaults:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \l_@@_legacy_env_params_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As we don't know much about this list we can only make a guess about
+% the nature of the list and the setting of the tag name (default
+% \texttt{list} rolemapped to \texttt{L}) and any tag attributes
+% may have to be overwritten in the optional key/value argument. But we do have some hints to play with.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @nmbrlist }
+ { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {enumerate} } % numbered list
+ { \tl_if_empty:NTF \@itemlabel
+ { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {list} } % no label
+ { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {itemize} } % unnumbered, unordered
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{trivlist}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{trivlist}{ !O{} }
+ { \list[#1]{}
+ {
+ \dim_zero:N \leftmargin
+ \dim_zero:N \labelwidth
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \makelabel \use:n
+ }
+ }
+ { \endblockenv }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Theorem-like environments}
+%
+% Theorem-like environments are defined in \LaTeX{} with the help of
+% \cs{newtheorem} declarations. Internally they use a list with a
+% single item. For now we keep this approach and only add appropriate
+% tagging support wihtin the internal commands.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@begintheorem,\@opargbegintheorem}
+%
+% We use \struct{theorem-like} as the structure name and rollmap it
+% to a list (\struct{L}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T {
+ \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=theorem-like,role=L}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% With that done, we only have to tell the \env{trivlist} what
+% \key{tag-name} it should use.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist[tag-name=theorem-like]%
+ \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2}]\itshape}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist[tag-name=theorem-like]
+ \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ (#3)}]\itshape}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Implementation of templates}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Implementation of blockenv templates \ldots}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\g_block_nesting_depth_int}
+% \LaTeXe{} already has a counter to record the nesting depth of
+% blocks, but we want our own name because it isn't really tied to
+% \enquote{lists} any more. However, \cs{@listdepth} is really part
+% of the legacy interface (for example \env{minipage} alters it to
+% point to a different counter) so that we are stuck with using at
+% least indirectly for now and the following line makes this look
+% like an L3 integer variable but internally expands to \cs{@listdepth}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \g_block_nesting_depth_int { \@listdepth } % a fake int
+ % for now
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{blockenv display}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateCode{blockenv}{display}{1}
+{
+ env-name = \l_@@_env_name_tl ,
+ tag-name = \l_@@_tag_name_tl ,
+ tag-class = \l_@@_tag_class_tl ,
+ tagging-recipe = \l_@@_tagging_recipe_tl ,
+ level-increase = \l_@@_level_incr_bool ,
+ setup-code = \l_@@_setup_code_tl ,
+ block-instance = \l_@@_block_instance_tl ,
+ para-instance = \l_@@_para_instance_tl ,
+ inner-level-counter = \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl ,
+ max-inner-levels = \l_@@_max_inner_levels_tl ,
+ inner-instance-type = \l_@@_inner_instance_type_tl ,
+ inner-instance = \l_@@_inner_instance_tl ,
+ para-flattened = \l__tag_para_flattened_bool ,
+ final-code = \l_@@_final_code_tl ,
+}
+{
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{\l_@@_env_name_tl -env-start}
+%
+ \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{blockenv}{display}{#1} }
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to know later if we haved nested blockenvs inside
+% a flattened environment. Whenever we start a new blockenv we
+% increment \cs{\l_@@_flattened_level_int} if it is already
+% different from zero. If it is zero we increment it if flattening
+% is requested.
+% Thus a value of \texttt{0} means no flattening requested so far
+% and \texttt{1} means this is the first blockenv requesting
+% flattening. In either case we have to make sure that the blockenv
+% is surrounded by a \texttt{text-unit} tag, while for any value above
+% \texttt{1} we have to omit the \texttt{text-unit}.
+ % \begin{macrocode}
+ \int_compare:nNnTF \l_@@_flattened_level_int > 0
+ {
+ \int_incr:N \l_@@_flattened_level_int
+ }
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_flattened_bool
+ {
+ \int_incr:N \l_@@_flattened_level_int
+ }
+ }
+%
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnTF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl >
+ { \l_@@_max_inner_levels_tl - 1 }
+ { \@toodeep }
+ { \int_incr:N \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl } % not clean "o"?
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Legacy defaults are only roped in if the list level changes. For
+% display blocks that remain on the same level the current values
+% are kept.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_level_incr_bool
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnTF \g_block_nesting_depth_int >
+ { \c@maxblocklevels - 1 }
+ { \@toodeep }
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g_block_nesting_depth_int
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If there are no legacy defaults for that level then the next line
+% does nothing, i.e., the current values (from the last level
+% become the defaults for the next.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \use:c { @list \int_to_roman:n { \g_block_nesting_depth_int } }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we are doing tagging we load one of the available recipes for
+% tagging, which alters various kernel hooks to add appropriate
+% tagging structures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_if_active:T { \use:c { @@_recipe_ \l_@@_tagging_recipe_tl : } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then run the setup code if any is given in the instance.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \l_@@_setup_code_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next call a block instance at the appropriate level passing it
+% any key/value list provided in the optional argument (keys that
+% are not recognized are ignored---currently with an
+% error).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{use~ instance:~
+ \l_@@_block_instance_tl - \int_use:N \g_block_nesting_depth_int }
+ \UseInstance{block}
+ { \l_@@_block_instance_tl - \int_use:N
+ \g_block_nesting_depth_int }
+ {#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After the block instance call the para and then inner (list)
+% instance if either or both are
+% specified (which may not be the case).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_para_instance_tl
+ {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{use~ para~ instance:~ \l_@@_para_instance_tl }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For now we don't offer to alter instance parameters here so we
+% pass an empty argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \UseInstance{para}{ \l_@@_para_instance_tl } {}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the inner instance may have its own levels or none depending
+% on which the instance name differs. Again we pass it the optional
+% key/value list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_instance_tl
+ {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{use~ instance:~ \l_@@_inner_instance_tl
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl
+ { - \int_use:N \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl }}
+ \UseInstance{ \l_@@_inner_instance_type_tl }
+ { \l_@@_inner_instance_tl
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl
+ { - \int_use:N \l_@@_inner_level_counter_tl } % not clean
+ % use "o"?
+ }
+ {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We finish off with \cs{l_@@_final_code_tl} which defaults to
+% \cs{ignorespaces} so that spaces between \verb=\begin{...}= and
+% the start of the text are ignored.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \l_@@_final_code_tl
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_flattened_level_int}
+% Count the levels of nested blockenvs starting with the first that
+% is \enquote{flattened}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \l_@@_flattened_level_int
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@maxblocklevels}
+% A counter to increase or decrease the number of supported
+% level. If increased, one needs to suply additional level instances.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{maxblocklevels}
+\setcounter{maxblocklevels}{6}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endblockenv}
+% The code executed when a blockenv ends is 99\% the same for all
+% blockenvs (at least up to now). Small differences exist, though. They
+% are accounted for first in the conditionals.
+%
+% We make this a public command so that new block environments can
+% be set up without the need to resort to L3 layer
+% programming.\fmi{name is bad}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \endblockenv {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{blockenv~ common~ ending \on@line}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this block was incrementing the level we have to decrement it
+% now again:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_level_incr_bool
+ { \int_gdecr:N \g_block_nesting_depth_int }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this block was a list and there are still \cs{item} labels to
+% be placed we move to horizontal mode to get them typeset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nT { @inlabel }
+ {
+ \mode_leave_vertical:
+ \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @inlabel }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In a pure ``displayblock'' scenario \texttt{@newlist} will be
+% always false and the code bypassed, but we may have an outer list
+% followed immediately by a displayblock (with the \cs{item} missing)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nT { @newlist }
+ {
+ \@noitemerr
+ \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @newlist }
+ }
+ \mode_if_horizontal:TF
+ { \@@_skip_remove_last: \@@_skip_remove_last: \par }
+ { \@inmatherr{\end{\@currenvir}} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Once we are back in vertical mode we can add the appropriate
+% closing tagging structure(s), if we are doing tagging.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_displayblock_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% What to do in terms of vertical spacing in different situations
+% is still somewhat open to debate, right now this is more or less
+% implementing what \LaTeXe{} list environment have been
+% doing.\fmi{some redesign/extensions here?}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \@@_debug_typeout:n{@noparlist =
+% \legacy_if:nTF { @noparlist }{true}{false}}
+ \legacy_if:nF { @noparlist }
+ {
+ \@@_skip_set_to_last:N \l_tmpa_skip
+ \dim_compare:nNnT \l_tmpa_skip > \c_zero_dim
+ {
+ \skip_vertical:n { - \l_tmpa_skip }
+ \skip_vertical:n { \l_tmpa_skip + \parskip - \@outerparskip }
+ }
+ \addpenalty \@endparpenalty
+ \addvspace \l_@@_topsepadd_skip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \LaTeXe{} triggered the paragraph handling after a list at this
+% point here, i.e., only if the list didn't start a paragraph. One
+% can make a case for that, but it can be somewhat surprising to
+% the user and there is a good argument that even such a list could
+% be followed expanatory text that is part of the same paragraph
+% and doesn't start a new one.\fmi{decide which logic we want to
+% use! If the old logic is used we need to close the text-unit
+% ourselves in the true branch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @endpe }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% So this is for now always done. Probably \cs{l_@@_topsepadd_skip} above
+% should be added only if the paragraph ends here and not if it
+% continues, so this need some further cleanup.\fmi{decide}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @endpe }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_displayblock_end:}
+% The kernel hook for tagging at the end of the block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_end: {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_end:}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Implementation of para templates \ldots}
+%
+% \begin{template}{para std}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateCode{para}{std}{1}
+{
+ indent-width = \parindent ,
+ start-skip = \l__par_start_skip , % name??
+ left-skip = \leftskip ,
+ right-skip = \rightskip ,
+ end-skip = \parfillskip ,
+ fixed-word-spaces = \l__par_fixed_word_spaces_bool , % name??
+ final-hyphen-demerits = \finalhyphendemerits ,
+ cr-cmd = \\ ,
+ para-class = \l_tag_para_attr_class_tl ,
+}
+{
+ \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{para}{std}{#1} }
+ \skip_set:Nn \@rightskip \rightskip
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Implementation of block templates \ldots}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{block display}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateCode{block}{display}{1}
+{
+ heading = \l_@@_heading_tl ,
+ beginsep = \topsep ,
+ begin-par-skip = \partopsep ,
+ par-skip = \parsep ,
+ end-skip = \l_@@_botsep_skip ,
+ end-par-skip = \l_@@_parbotsep_skip ,
+ beginpenalty = \@beginparpenalty ,
+ endpenalty = \@endparpenalty ,
+ rightmargin = \rightmargin ,
+ leftmargin = \leftmargin ,
+ parindent = \listparindent ,
+}
+{
+ \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{block}{display}{#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \fmi{generalize heading usage (or drop?)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_blank:oF \l_@@_heading_tl
+ { \mode_leave_vertical: \textbf{\l_@@_heading_tl} } % TODO customize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The code largely follows the logic of \LaTeXe{}'s \env{trivlist}
+% implementation as far as it applicable for the \enquote{display
+% block} but coded using the L3 programming layer. However, we keep
+% all the legacy variables (e.g., \texttt{@noskipsec}) if there is
+% some chance that they are set in classes or packages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nT { @noskipsec } { \mode_leave_vertical: }
+ \skip_set:Nn \l_@@_topsepadd_skip { \topsep }
+ \mode_if_vertical:TF
+ {
+ \skip_add:Nn \l_@@_topsepadd_skip { \partopsep }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point it is safe to add tagging structure(s) so we have
+% a kernel-owned hook here for tagging. This is used to possibly
+% start a paragraph structure (to surround the block, for example,
+% in case of lists) and possibly do some other preparation for
+% tagging the block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:
+ }
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we are in horizontal mode then the displayblock has to return
+% to vertical mode now (after removing any immediately preceding
+% skip or kern. But before we actually issue the\cs{par} we execute
+% a kernel hook in which we can add tagging code. This hook is
+% \enquote{weird} because by default it does nothing, but if
+% tagging is wanted it takes an argument and grabs the following
+% \cs{par} in order to put tagging code before and after the \cs{par}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_skip_remove_last: \@@_skip_remove_last:
+ \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w \par
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we are back to legacy list implementation \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @inlabel }
+ {
+ \legacy_if_set_true:n { @noparitem }
+ \legacy_if_set_true:n { @noparlist }
+ }
+ {
+ \legacy_if:nT { @newlist } { \@noitemerr }
+ \legacy_if_set_false:n { @noparlist }
+ \skip_set_eq:NN \l_@@_effective_top_skip \l_@@_topsepadd_skip
+ }
+ \skip_add:Nn \l_@@_effective_top_skip { \parskip }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next lines set some paragraph defaults, this may get overwritten
+% if there is a \key{para-instance} specified on the \xt{blockenv}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \skip_zero:N \leftskip
+ \skip_set_eq:NN \rightskip \@rightskip
+ \skip_set_eq:NN \parfillskip \@flushglue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next lines establish a parshape which is retained across
+% paragraphs be executing \cs{para_end:} within a group and thus
+% reestablishing the parshape for the next paragraph again. In case
+% a list got started \cs{par} is ignored until we have seen an
+% \cs{item} (or we have executed \cs{par} one thousand times.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \int_zero:N \par@deathcycles
+ \@setpar
+ {
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @newlist }
+ {
+ \int_incr:N \par@deathcycles
+ \int_compare:nNnTF \par@deathcycles > { 1000 }
+ { \@noitemerr
+ { \para_end: }
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ { \para_end: }
+ }
+ }
+ \skip_set_eq:NN \@outerparskip \parskip
+ \skip_set_eq:NN \parskip \parsep
+ \dim_set_eq:NN \parindent \listparindent
+ \dim_add:Nn \linewidth { - \rightmargin - \leftmargin }
+ \dim_add:Nn \@totalleftmargin { \leftmargin }
+ \tex_parshape:D 1 ~ \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is the point where we are ready to add the tagging structure
+% for the block, e.g., an \verb=<L>=, a \verb=<Figure>= or some
+% other structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_displayblock_begin:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, we have to output the vertical separation and penalty at
+% the start of the block and make corrections for a change in
+% \cs{parskip} and some other housekeeping, unless this block is inside a list and the list
+% \cs{item} has not yet placed. In that case the vertical
+% space and penalty us suppressed. This
+% is controled through the legacy switches \texttt{@noparitem},
+% \texttt{minipage}, and \texttt{@nobreak}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @noparitem }
+ {
+ \legacy_if_set_false:n { @noparitem }
+ \hbox_gset:Nn \g_@@_labels_box
+ {
+ \skip_horizontal:n { - \leftmargin }
+ \hbox_unpack_drop:N \g_@@_labels_box
+ \skip_horizontal:n { \leftmargin }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \fmi{document 2e logic used here}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nF { @minipage } % Why this chunk of code?
+ {
+ \@@_skip_set_to_last:N \l_@@_tmpa_skip
+ \skip_vertical:n { - \l_@@_tmpa_skip }
+ \skip_vertical:n { \l_@@_tmpa_skip + \@outerparskip - \parskip }
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @nobreak }
+ { \addvspace{\skip_eval:n{\@outerparskip-\parskip}} }
+ {
+ \addpenalty \@beginparpenalty
+ \addvspace \l_@@_effective_top_skip
+ \addvspace{-\parskip}
+ }
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Extra keys to support enumitem conventions:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\keys_define:nn { template/block/display }
+{
+ ,topsep .skip_set:N = \topsep
+ ,partopsep .skip_set:N = \partopsep
+ ,listparindent .skip_set:N = \listparindent
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_displayblock_begin:,
+% \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w,
+% \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:}
+% The internal kernel hooks for tagging.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_begin: {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_begin:}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode: {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{\detokenize{__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Implementation of list templates \ldots}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@itemlabel,\@listctr}
+% Both \cs{@itemlabel} and \cs{@listctr} from the \LaTeXe{} list
+% implementation are used (or set) by various packages. We
+% therefore use them too, so that these packages have a fighting
+% chance to work with the new tagging-aware implementation for
+% \env{list}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \@itemlabel % should have a top-level definition
+\tl_new:N \@listctr % should have a top-level definition
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{list std}
+%
+% This template implements numbered and unnumbered lists and can
+% be combined with display blocks or with inline blocks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateCode{list}{std}{1}
+{
+ counter = \l_@@_counter_tl,
+ item-label = \l_@@_item_label_tl,
+ start = \l_@@_counter_start_int ,
+ resume = \l_@@_resume_bool ,
+ item-instance = \@@_item_instance:n ,
+ item-skip = \itemsep ,
+% item-par-skip = \parsep ,
+ item-penalty = \@itempenalty ,
+ item-indent = \itemindent ,
+ label-width = \labelwidth ,
+ label-sep = \labelsep ,
+ legacy-support = \l_@@_legacy_support_bool , % FMi questionable
+}
+{
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{template:list:std}
+%
+ \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \SetTemplateKeys{list}{std}{#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Has this list a counter name defined in the instance?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_counter_tl
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If not we check if \cs{@listctr} has a non-empty value to be used
+% for the list counter.
+%
+% We better test for blank not empty in case somebody had defined
+% \cs{@listctr} using \cs{renewcommand} or \cs{cs_set:Npn}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_blank:oF \@listctr
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In that case \texttt{@nmbrlist} should have been set too, for
+% example, through \cs{usecounter}, so we do not set it
+% explicitly. However, we check if we should resume a previous list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_if:NF \l_@@_resume_bool
+ {
+ \int_gset:cn{ c@ \@listctr }
+ { \l_@@_counter_start_int - 1 }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{@listctr} is not set then we have definitely an unnumbered list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { \@nmbrlistfalse }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a counter is set in the list instance we use that
+% one. This should be the name of a \LaTeX{} counter that is
+% already allocated externally---no runtime check is made for this:
+% if it is not declared one will get \enquote{no such counter}
+% error when the list is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \@nmbrlisttrue
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \@listctr \l_@@_counter_tl
+ \bool_if:NF \l_@@_resume_bool
+ {
+ \int_gset:cn{ c@ \@listctr }
+ { \l_@@_counter_start_int - 1 }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Does the current instance has an item label representation? This
+% would be possible whether or not we have a numbered list. If yes,
+% then we use this for \cs{@itemlabel}, otherwise we expect that
+% \cs{@itemlabel} is provided from the outside, e.g., as part of
+% the \env{list} environment argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_item_label_tl
+ {
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \@itemlabel \l_@@_item_label_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% finally, we signal that we are at the start of a new list (which
+% effects how the first \cs{item} is handled and how \cs{par}
+% commands are interpreted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @newlist }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{template:list:std~end}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Extra keys to support enumitem conventions:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\keys_define:nn { template/list/std }
+{
+ ,nosep .code:n =
+ \dim_zero:N \itemsep
+ \dim_zero:N \parsep
+ \dim_zero:N \topsep
+ \dim_zero:N \l_@@_botsep_skip
+ \dim_zero:N \l_@@_parbotsep_skip
+ ,midsep .skip_set:N = \topsep
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Implementation of \cs{item} template(s)}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{template}{item std}
+% The item template has one hidden key \texttt{label} which is not available on the
+% template for setting because it is only used to receive any
+% optional data passed to the \cs{item} command. We therefore
+% declare it with \cs{keys_define:nn} and ensure that the optional
+% argument data to \cs{item} (if it is not a key/value list
+% already) is passed to this \texttt{label} key.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\keys_define:nn { template/item/std }
+ { label .tl_set:N = \l_@@_label_given_tl }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \fmi{alignment is mostly wrong (test short medium and multiline
+% labels)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTemplateCode{item}{std}{1}
+ {
+ counter-label = \@@_counter_label:n ,
+ counter-ref = \@@_counter_ref:n ,
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \fmi{next set of key not yet used}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ label-ref = \@@_label_ref:n ,
+ label-autoref = \@@_label_autoref:n ,
+ label-format = \@@_label_format:n ,
+ label-strut = \l_@@_label_strut_bool ,
+ label-boxed = \l_@@_label_boxed_bool ,
+ next-line = \l_@@_next_line_bool ,
+ text-font = \l_@@_text_font_tl ,
+ compatibility = \l_@@_item_compatibility_bool ,
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This probably needs a different implementation (and needs completing)\fmi{complete}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ label-align = {
+ left = \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_item_align_tl { \relax \hss } ,
+ center = \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_item_align_tl { \hss \hss } ,
+ right = \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_item_align_tl { \hss \relax } ,
+ parleft = \NOT_IMPLEMENTED ,
+ } ,
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then typeset the label at its natural width by applying
+% \cs{@@_make_label_box:n} to the label given or to a label constructed
+% from the counter. If it is boxed and reasonably short, add padding to
+% make it at least of size \tn{labelwidth}, then add another layer of
+% box. This way, when we unpack it in \cs{g_@@_labels_box} it correctly
+% remains boxed in those cases. Afterwards, in the \texttt{nextline}
+% case add \tn{newline} if the label did not fit in the allotted space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{template:item:std}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% First deal with the key--value input, which in particular may
+% provide a value for the label (the usual optional argument of
+% \cs{item}). For this we set \cs{l_@@_label_given_tl} to
+% \cs{c_novalue_tl} so that we can identify if an optional argument
+% was given.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_label_given_tl \c_novalue_tl
+ \tl_if_empty:nF{#1}{ \SetTemplateKeys{item}{std}{#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If no optional argument was given then \cs{l_@@_label_given_tl}
+% is still equal to \cs{c_novalue_tl} and so we can distinuish
+% that from \verb=\item[]=.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_novalue:oTF \l_@@_label_given_tl
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The rest of the code for this template needs work and is both
+% incomplete and partly wrong.\fmi{fix}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_blank:oF \@listctr { \@kernel@refstepcounter \@listctr }
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_item_compatibility_bool % not sure that conditional
+ % makes sense
+ { \@@_make_label_box:n { \MakeLinkTarget[\@listctr]{}\@itemlabel } } % TODO ?
+ { \@@_make_label_box:n { \MakeLinkTarget[\@listctr]{}\@@_counter_label:n { \@listctr } } }
+ }
+ {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{item~ with~ optional}
+ \@@_make_label_box:n { \l_@@_label_given_tl } }
+ \bool_if:nT
+ {
+ \l_@@_label_boxed_bool
+ && \dim_compare_p:n { \box_wd:N \l_@@_one_label_box <= \linewidth } % TODO: is \linewidth correct?
+ }
+ {
+ \dim_compare:nNnT
+ { \box_wd:N \l_@@_one_label_box } < \labelwidth
+ {
+ \hbox_set_to_wd:Nnn \l_@@_one_label_box { \labelwidth }
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN \use_i:nn \l_@@_item_align_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% FMi: \LaTeXe{} keeps the label boxed inside (not unboxed). This
+% means that the content stays rigid and does not vary based on
+% glue setting in the line with the label.
+% There are cases where we do want the unboxed version (I think
+% enumitem offers that in some cases too) but it should probably
+% not the default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \hbox_unpack_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box %TODO: customize?
+ \box_use_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \exp_after:wN \use_ii:nn \l_@@_item_align_tl
+ }
+ }
+ \hbox_set:Nn \l_@@_one_label_box
+ { \box_use_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box }
+ }
+ \dim_compare:nNnTF { \box_wd:N \l_@@_one_label_box } > \labelwidth
+ { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_long_label_bool }
+ { \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_long_label_bool }
+ \hbox_gset:Nn \g_@@_labels_box
+ {
+ \hbox_unpack_drop:N \g_@@_labels_box
+ \skip_horizontal:n { \itemindent - \labelsep - \labelwidth }
+ \hbox_unpack_drop:N \l_@@_one_label_box
+ \skip_horizontal:n { \labelsep }
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_next_line_bool
+ { \bool_if:NT \l_@@_long_label_bool { \nobreak \hfil \break } }
+ % version of \newline inside an hbox that will be unpacked
+ }
+ % \skip_set_eq:NN \parsep \l_@@_item_parsep_skip TODO??? FMi
+ % what's that?
+ \dim_set_eq:NN \parindent \listparindent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Placing the list label(s) is done when the paragraph for the
+% \cs{item} is started, which executes \cs{@@_item_everypar:}
+% inside \hook{para/begin}. By default this command does nothing, now we
+% change it to attach the pending label or labels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_item_everypar: \@@_item_everypar_std:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{template}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_one_label_box, \g_@@_labels_box}
+% Each label is typeset in \cs{l_@@_one_label_box} to be measured.
+% Once this is ready, it is put (boxed or unboxed) in
+% \cs{g_@@_labels_box}, together with any pending labels (for the case
+% where a list begins just after \tn{item}). This is an analogue of
+% \LaTeXe{}'s \tn{@labels}, but it is always unboxed before use, to
+% support both boxed and unboxed labels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\box_new:N \l_@@_one_label_box
+\box_new:N \g_@@_labels_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_long_label_bool}
+% Track whether the \cs{l_@@_one_label_box} is larger than
+% \tn{labelwidth}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_long_label_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_make_label_box:n, \@@_label_format:x}
+% Make one label, wrapped in \cs{@@_label_format:n}, with an
+% appropriate \tn{strut} and possibly \tn{makelabel} in compatibility
+% mode (used for the \env{list} environment).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_make_label_box:n #1
+ {
+ \hbox_set:Nn \l_@@_one_label_box
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we do tagging then the contents of this box may need to be
+% wrapped into a structure, e.g., \verb=<Lbl>=.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_list_label_begin:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_label_format:n
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_label_strut_bool { \strut }
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_legacy_support_bool
+ \makelabel
+ \use:n
+ {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And what gets opened also needs closing:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_list_label_end:
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_begin:,
+% \__kernel_list_label_end:}
+% If we aren't doing tagging the kernel hooks do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_label_begin: \prg_do_nothing:
+\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_label_end: \prg_do_nothing:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_item_everypar:, \@@_item_everypar_std:}
+% The \cs{@@_item_everypar:} command is executed as part of \hook{para/begin}
+% but most of the time does nothing, i.e., it has the following
+% default definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_item_everypar: \prg_do_nothing:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{para/begin}[lists]{\@@_item_everypar:}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that we have to make sure that the above code is executed
+% after the hook chunk from \texttt{tagpdf} because the latter uses
+% \texttt{@inlabel} to make a decision.
+%
+% By the end of the day both should probably move into the kernel
+% hook instead!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareHookRule{para/begin}{lists}{after}{tagpdf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% What follows is the version that resets various legacy booleans and puts
+% the label box in the right place and finally resets itself to do
+% nothing next time. \cs{@@_item_everypar:} is set to this by the
+% item template so that the next paragraph start runs the code below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_item_everypar_std: {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{item~ everypar \on@line }
+ \legacy_if_set_false:n { @minipage }
+ \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @newlist }
+ \legacy_if:nT { @inlabel }
+ {
+ \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @inlabel }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \box_if_empty:NT \g_para_indent_box { \kern - \itemindent }
+ \para_omit_indent:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \box_use_drop:N \g_@@_labels_box
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After the labels are placed we start a paragraph structure (if
+% appropriate). This is handled in the following kernel hook:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_list_label_after:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \penalty \c_zero_int
+ }
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @nobreak }
+ {
+ \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @nobreak }
+ \int_set:Nn \clubpenalty { 10000 }
+ }
+ {
+ \int_set_eq:NN \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Once the label(s) are typeset and we are past any special
+% \texttt{@nobreak} handling we reset \cs{@@_item_everypar:} to do
+% nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_item_everypar: \prg_do_nothing:
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_after:}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_label_after: \prg_do_nothing:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_tmpa_skip}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\skip_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_skip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_topsepadd_skip, \l_@@_effective_top_skip}
+% Variables equivalent to \LaTeXe{}'s \tn{@topsepadd} and \tn{@topsep}.
+% Roughly equal to a mixture of \texttt{topsep}, \texttt{partopsep},
+% and various \texttt{parskip} at different nesting levels in lists.
+% The code is really elaborate when \texttt{@inlabel} is true.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\skip_new:N \l_@@_topsepadd_skip
+\skip_new:N \l_@@_effective_top_skip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\item}
+% Here we already have all the building blocks. Complain in math
+% mode. Distingusih between first item (do necessary tagging) and
+% later items \cs{@@_inter_item:} to
+% cleanly close what's before, then call \cs{@@_item_instance:n} (which
+% calls \cs{UseInstance}\{item\}\marg{instance}) to prepare the
+% upcoming item: it will be actually inserted only once some later
+% material triggers \tn{everypar}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{
+ \RenewDocumentCommand{\item}{ ={label}o }
+ {
+ \@inmatherr \item
+% \end{macrocode}
+% TODO: Test for being outside of a list needs updating!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_empty:oTF \@@_item_instance:n %%FMi?
+ { \msg_error:nnn { @@ } { item-in-nonlist } { \item[{#1}] } }
+ {
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @newlist }
+ { \__kernel_list_item_begin: }
+ { \@@_inter_item: }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To avoid unnecessary key/val processing we make a quick check if
+% there was an optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1} % avoids reparsing label={}
+ { \@@_item_instance:n { } }
+ { \@@_item_instance:n {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set the legacy switch that signals that we have a pending item label:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if_gset_true:n { @inlabel }
+ \ignorespaces
+ }
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_inter_item:}
+% Between items. If the previous item had no content then we need to
+% trigger \tn{everypar}. Otherwise we simply close the previous item
+% with \tn{par} after removing some horizontal space. Between items,
+% there is a penalty and some space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_inter_item: {
+ \legacy_if:nT { @inlabel }
+ { \indent \par } % case of \item\item
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{par} may have a strange definition and may not get us back to
+% vertical mode in one go, so we better do not treat the next line
+% as an else case to the above conditional (for now).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \mode_if_horizontal:T { \@@_skip_remove_last:
+ \@@_skip_remove_last: \par }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End any LI-tag, then start the next LI-tag (if doing tagging):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \__kernel_list_item_end:
+ \__kernel_list_item_begin:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addpenalty \@itempenalty
+ \addvspace \itemsep
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_item_begin:,
+% \__kernel_list_item_end:}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_begin: \prg_do_nothing:
+\cs_new_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_end: \prg_do_nothing:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Tagging recipes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_recipe_basic:}
+% The \texttt{basic} recipe simply ensures that the block is inside
+% a \texttt{text-unit} structure and if necessary starts one. When the
+% block ends and is followed by a blank line the \texttt{text-unit}
+% structure is closed too, otherwise it remains open and further
+% text starts with just a \struct{text} structure.
+%
+% There is otherwise no inner structure so
+% \cs{__kernel_displayblock_begin:} and
+% \cs{__kernel_displayblock_end:} do nothing---blockenvs with inner
+% structure use the \texttt{standard} or \texttt{list} recipe instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_recipe_basic: {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w
+ \@@_beginpar_hmode:N
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:
+ \@@_beginpar_vmode:
+ \let \__kernel_displayblock_begin: \prg_do_nothing:
+ \let \__kernel_displayblock_end: \prg_do_nothing:
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_recipe_standard:}
+% The \texttt{standard} recipe does the following:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item surround the block with a \texttt{text-unit}-structure if not already in a
+% a \texttt{text-unit}. In the latter case end the
+% MC and the \struct{text} but leave the \texttt{text-unit} open.
+%
+% If we are producing flattened paragraphs, just close any
+% \struct{text} but do not open a \texttt{text-unit}.
+%
+% \item Then open an new (inner) structure (by default
+% \texttt{Figure} but typically the one specified on the instance).
+% \item At the end of the block close the the inner structure
+% (\texttt{Figure} or explicit one)
+% but leave the \texttt{text-unit} open to be either continued or closed due to a
+% following \cs{par}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_recipe_standard:
+{
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w
+ \@@_beginpar_hmode:N
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:
+ \@@_beginpar_vmode:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_begin: \@@_inner_begin:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_end: \@@_inner_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tag_name_tl
+ { \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl {Figure} }
+ { \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl \l_@@_tag_name_tl }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_recipe_list:}
+% The \texttt{list} recipe does the following.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item It opens a \struct{text-unit}-structure or keeps the current one open (only
+% closing the MC).
+% \item It then starts a new structure rollmapped to L-structure
+% and arranges for handling list items, e.g., Li, Lbl and LBody
+% structures.
+% \item At the end it closes open list structures as needed but
+% keeps the \struct{text-unit}-structure open to continue the paragraph after the
+% list, if necessary.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_recipe_list:
+{
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_hmode:w
+ \@@_beginpar_hmode:N
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_beginpar_vmode:
+ \@@_beginpar_vmode:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_begin: \@@_list_begin:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_displayblock_end: \@@_list_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next two lines could be done globally, because they are only
+% called if we do have \cs{item}s, i.e., if we are in a list. It is
+% therefore also not necessary to reset them in other recipes
+% (right now---this may change if we get more templates (like
+% inline lists)).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_begin: \@@_list_item_begin:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \__kernel_list_item_end: \@@_list_item_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Handle the tag name and attribute classess using the key values
+% from the current list instance.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tag_name_tl
+ { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_tag_tl {L} }
+ { \tl_set_eq:NN \l__tag_L_tag_tl \l_@@_tag_name_tl }
+ \tl_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tag_class_tl
+ { \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {} }
+ { \tl_set_eq:NN \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl \l_@@_tag_class_tl }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+
+
+% \subsection{Blockenv instances}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Basic instances}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv displayblock}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{displayblock}{display}
+{
+ env-name = displayblock,
+ tag-name = ,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = standard,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = false,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = displayblock ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv displayblockflattened}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{displayblockflattened}{display}
+{
+ env-name = displayblockflattened,
+ tag-name = ,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = basic,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = false,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = displayblock ,
+ para-flattened = true ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv center}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{center}{display}
+{
+ env-name = center,
+ tag-name = ,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = basic,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = false,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = displayblock ,
+ para-flattened = true ,
+ para-instance = center ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv flushleft}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{flushleft}{display}
+{
+ env-name = flushleft,
+ tag-name = ,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = basic,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = false,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = displayblock ,
+ para-flattened = true ,
+ para-instance = raggedright ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv flushright}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{flushright}{display}
+{
+ env-name = flushleft,
+ tag-name = ,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = basic,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = false,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = displayblock ,
+ para-flattened = true ,
+ para-instance = raggedleft ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Blockquote instances}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv quotation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T {
+ \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=quote,role=BlockQuote}}
+ \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=quotation,role=BlockQuote}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quotation}{display}
+{
+ env-name = quotation,
+ tag-name = quotation,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = standard,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = true,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = quotationblock ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv quote}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quote}{display}
+{
+ env-name = quote,
+ tag-name = quote,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = standard,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = true,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = quoteblock ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+% An alternative setup for quotations, using the displayblock instance and
+% just overwrite a bit in the setup code.\fmi{I guess the setup
+% code is still executed too early, have to check.}
+% This would be less flexible but would ensure visual consistency,
+% because the displayblock settings are used throughout.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quotation}{display}
+% {
+% env-name = quotation,
+% tag-name = ,
+% tag-class = ,
+% tagging-recipe = blockquote,
+% inner-level-counter = ,
+% level-increase = true,
+% setup-code = \setlength\rightmargin{\leftmargin}
+% \setlength\parsep{1.5em} ,
+% block-instance = displayblock ,
+% inner-instance = ,
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \DeclareInstance{blockenv}{quote}{display}
+% {
+% env-name = quote,
+% tag-name = ,
+% tag-class = ,
+% tagging-recipe = blockquote,
+% inner-level-counter = ,
+% level-increase = true,
+% setup-code = \setlength\rightmargin{\leftmargin} ,
+% block-instance = displayblock ,
+% inner-instance = ,
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Verbatim instances}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T {
+ \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=verbatim,role=P}}
+ \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=codeline,role=Sub}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Possible alternative for PDF 1.7:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=verbatim,role=Div}}
+% \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=codeline,role=P}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{verbatim}{display}
+{
+ env-name = verbatim,
+ tag-name = verbatim,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = standard,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = false,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = displayblock ,
+ inner-instance = ,
+ final-code = \legacyverbatimsetup ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Standard list instances}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{itemize}{display}
+{
+ env-name = itemize,
+ tag-name = itemize,
+ tag-class = itemize,
+ tagging-recipe = list,
+ inner-level-counter = \@itemdepth,
+ level-increase = true,
+ max-inner-levels = 4,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = list ,
+ inner-instance = itemize ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{enumerate}{display}
+{
+ env-name = enumerate,
+ tag-name = enumerate,
+ tag-class = enumerate,
+ tagging-recipe = list,
+ level-increase = true,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = list ,
+ inner-level-counter = \@enumdepth,
+ max-inner-levels = 4,
+ inner-instance = enum ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv description}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{description}{display}
+{
+ env-name = description,
+ tag-name = description,
+ tag-class = description,
+ tagging-recipe = list,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ level-increase = true,
+ setup-code = ,
+ block-instance = list ,
+ inner-instance = description ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{blockenv list}
+% The general (legacy) \env{list} environment does some of its
+% setup in the \texttt{setup-code} key.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{blockenv}{list}{display}
+{
+ env-name = list,
+ tag-name = list,
+ tag-class = ,
+ tagging-recipe = list,
+ level-increase = true,
+ setup-code = \legacylistsetupcode ,
+ block-instance = list ,
+ inner-level-counter = ,
+ inner-instance = legacy ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Block instances}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Displayblock instances}
+%
+% We provide 6 nesting levels (as in \LaTeXe{}). If you want to
+% provide more you need to change the \texttt{maxblocklevels}
+% counter, offer further \texttt{displayblock-xx} instances but
+% also define further (legacy) \cs{list\meta{romannumeral}} commands
+% for the defaults. If not, then the settings from the previous
+% level are reused automatically---which may or may not be good enough).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{maxblocklevels}{6}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{block displayblock-0,
+% block displayblock-1,
+% block displayblock-2,
+% block displayblock-3,
+% block displayblock-4,
+% block displayblock-5,
+% block displayblock-6 }
+%
+% Here we need level zero as well in case a flattened displayblock
+% (like the center env) it is used on top-level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{displayblock-0}{display}
+ {
+ leftmargin = 0pt ,
+ parindent = 0pt ,
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-1}{displayblock-0}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-2}{displayblock-0}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-3}{displayblock-0}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-4}{displayblock-0}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-5}{displayblock-0}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{displayblock-6}{displayblock-0}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Quote/quotationblock instances}
+%
+% Quote and quotation are not flattened, i.e., they change levels,
+% thus they start with level 1 not 0.
+%
+% \begin{instance}{block quoteblock-1,
+% block quoteblock-2,
+% block quoteblock-3,
+% block quoteblock-4,
+% block quoteblock-5,
+% block quoteblock-6 }
+% Default layout is to indent equaly from both side.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{quoteblock-1}{display}
+ { rightmargin = \KeyValue{leftmargin} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-2}{quoteblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-3}{quoteblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-4}{quoteblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-5}{quoteblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quoteblock-6}{quoteblock-1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{block quotationblock-1,
+% block quotationblock-2,
+% block quotationblock-3,
+% block quotationblock-4,
+% block quotationblock-5,
+% block quotationblock-6 }
+% Quotation additionally changes the parindent.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{quotationblock-1}{display}
+ { parindent = 1.5em , rightmargin = \KeyValue{leftmargin} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-2}{quotationblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-3}{quotationblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-4}{quotationblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-5}{quotationblock-1}
+\DeclareInstanceCopy{block}{quotationblock-6}{quotationblock-1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Block instances for the standard lists}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{block list-1,
+% block list-2,
+% block list-3,
+% block list-4,
+% block list-5,
+% block list-6 }
+% The block instances for the various list environments use the
+% same underlying instance (well by default) and nothing nothing
+% needs to be set up specifically (because that is already done in
+% the legacy \cs{list\meta{romannumeral}} unless a
+% different layout is wanted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{list-1}{display}{
+% heading = ,
+% beginsep = \topsep ,
+% begin-par-skip = \partopsep ,
+% par-skip = \parsep ,
+% end-skip = \KeyValue{beginsep} ,
+% end-par-skip = \KeyValue{begin-par-skip} ,
+% beginpenalty = \UseName{@beginparpenalty} ,
+% endpenalty = \UseName{@endparpenalty} ,
+% leftmargin = \leftmargin ,
+% rightmargin = \rightmargin ,
+% parindent = \listparindent ,
+}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{list-2}{display}{}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{list-3}{display}{}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{list-4}{display}{}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{list-5}{display}{}
+\DeclareInstance{block}{list-6}{display}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{List instances for the standard lists}
+%
+% For all list instances we have to say what kind of label we want
+% (\texttt{label-instance}) and how it should beformatted.
+%
+% \begin{instance}{list itemize-1,
+% list itemize-2,
+% list itemize-3,
+% list itemize-4}
+% For \env{itemize} environments this is all we need to do and we
+% refer back to the external definitions rather than defining the
+% \texttt{item-label} code in the instance to ensure that old
+% documents still work.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-1}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemi }
+\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-2}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemii }
+\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-3}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemiii }
+\DeclareInstance{list}{itemize-4}{std}{ item-label = \labelitemiv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{list enumerate-1,
+% list enumerate-2,
+% list enumerate-3,
+% list enumerate-4}
+% \env{enumerate} environments are similar, except that we also
+% have to say which counter to use on every level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-1}{std}
+ { item-label = \labelenumi , counter = enumi }
+\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-2}{std}
+ { item-label = \labelenumii , counter = enumii }
+\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-3}{std}
+ { item-label = \labelenumiii , counter = enumiii }
+\DeclareInstance{list}{enum-4}{std}
+ { item-label = \labelenumiv , counter = enumiv }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{list legacy}
+% For the legacy \env{list} environment there is only one instance
+% which is reused on all levels. This is done this way one because
+% the legacy \env{list} environment sets all its
+% parameters through its arguments. So this instances shouldn't
+% really be touched. It sets the \texttt{legacy-support} key to
+% true, which means that the list code uses \cs{makelabel} for
+% formatting the label
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{list}{legacy}{std} {
+ item-instance = basic ,
+ legacy-support = true ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{list description}
+% The \env{description} lists also use only a single list instance
+% with only one key not using the default:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{list}{description}{std} { item-instance = description }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Item instances}
+%
+%
+% \begin{instance}{item basic, item description}
+% There two item instances set up: \texttt{description} for use
+% with the \env{description} environment and \texttt{basic} for use
+% with all other lists (up to now).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{item}{basic}{std}
+ {
+ label-align = right ,
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{item}{description}{std}
+ {
+ label-format = \normalfont\bfseries #1 ,
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Para instances}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T
+{
+ \tagpdfsetup
+ {
+ newattribute = {justify} {/O /Layout /TextAlign/Justify},
+ newattribute = {center} {/O /Layout /TextAlign/Center},
+ newattribute = {raggedright}{/O /Layout /TextAlign/Start},
+ newattribute = {raggedleft} {/O /Layout /TextAlign/End},
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{instance}{para center}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{para}{center}{std}
+{
+ indent-width = 0pt ,
+ start-skip = 0pt ,
+ left-skip = \@flushglue ,
+ right-skip = \@flushglue ,
+ end-skip = \z@skip ,
+ final-hyphen-demerits = 0 ,
+ cr-cmd = \@centercr ,
+ para-class = center ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{para}{raggedright}{std}
+{
+ indent-width = 0pt ,
+ start-skip = 0pt ,
+ left-skip = \z@skip ,
+ right-skip = \@flushglue ,
+ end-skip = \z@skip ,
+ final-hyphen-demerits = 0 ,
+ cr-cmd = \@centercr ,
+ para-class = raggedright ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{para}{raggedleft}{std}
+{
+ indent-width = 0pt ,
+ start-skip = 0pt ,
+ left-skip = \@flushglue ,
+ right-skip = \z@skip ,
+ end-skip = \z@skip ,
+ final-hyphen-demerits = 0 ,
+ cr-cmd = \@centercr ,
+ para-class = raggedleft ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInstance{para}{justify}{std}
+{
+% indent-width = 0pt ,
+ start-skip = 0pt ,
+ left-skip = \z@skip ,
+ right-skip = \z@skip ,
+ end-skip = \@flushglue ,
+ final-hyphen-demerits = 5000 ,
+ cr-cmd = \@normalcr ,
+ para-class = justify ,
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{instance}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\centering {\UseInstance{para}{center}{}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\raggedleft {\UseInstance{para}{raggedleft}{}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\raggedright{\UseInstance{para}{raggedright}{}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\justifying {\UseInstance{para}{justify}{}}
+
+\justifying
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Tagging support}
+%
+% In this section we provide code to the various kernel hooks to support
+% the tagging of the different displayblock environments.
+%
+%
+%
+% All of the following definitions should only be made if tagging
+% is active!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T {
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_beginpar_vmode:}
+% When a block starts out in vertical mode, i.e., is not yet part of
+% a paragraph, we have to start a paragraph
+% structure. However, this is not the case if we are already
+% flattening paragraphs, thus in this case we do nothing.
+% We also do nothing if \texttt{@endpe} is currently true, because
+% that means we are right now just after the end of a
+% \texttt{blockenv} and in the process of looking if we have to end
+% the current \texttt{text-unit}, i.e., it is already open.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set:Npn \@@_beginpar_vmode: {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n
+ { @endpe = \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe }{true}{false}
+ \on@line }
+ \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe }
+ {
+ \legacy_if_gset_false:n { @endpe }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We test for \texttt{<2} because the first flattened environment
+% has to surround itself with a \texttt{text-unit}. Only any inner ones
+% then have to avoid adding another \texttt{text-unit}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+% \typeout{-->G1~ (\int_use:N \l_@@_flattened_level_int)}
+ \int_compare:nNnT \l_@@_flattened_level_int < 2
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_begin_int
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_beginpar_hmode:N}
+% If the block is already part of a part of a paragraph, i.e., when it has
+% some text directly in front, then the first thing to
+% do is to return to vertical mode. However, that should be done
+% without inserting a paragraph end tag, so before calling \cs{par}
+% to do its normal work, we disable paragraph tagging and
+% restarting afterwards again. The argument to this config point
+% simply gobbles the \cs{par} following it in the code above (which
+% is used when there is no tagging going on.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_set:Npn \@@_beginpar_hmode:N #1
+ {
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_end_int
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ /P \on@line }
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_show_bool
+ { \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact}
+ \rlap{\color_select:n{red}\tiny\ \int_use:N\g__tag_para_end_int}
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ }
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \tagpdfparaOff \par \tagpdfparaOn
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_displayblock_doendpe:}
+% If a display block ends and is followed by a blank line we have to end the
+% enclosing paragraph tagging structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_displayblock_doendpe: {
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Given that restoring \cs{par} through the legacy \LaTeXe{} method
+% can take a few iterations (for example, in case of nested lists,
+% e.g., \verb=...\end{itemize} \item ...\par= it can happen that
+% \cs{__kernel_displayblock_doendpe:} is called while
+% \texttt{@endpe} is already handled and then we should not attempt
+% to close a \texttt{text-unit} structure. So we need to check for this.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nT { @endpe }
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the display block currently ending was \enquote{flattened}
+% (i.e., uses simplified paragraphs that are not tagged by a
+% combination of \texttt{text-unit} followed by \struct{text}, but simply
+% with a \struct{text},
+% then we don't have to do anything, because the \struct{text} is already closed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n
+ { flattened= \bool_if:NTF
+ \l__tag_para_flattened_bool {true}{false}
+ \on@line }
+ \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool
+ {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{Structure-end~
+ \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl\space after~ list \on@line }
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int
+ \tag_struct_end: %text-unit
+ }
+ }
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{para/begin}
+%
+% Paragraph tagging is mainly done using the paragraph hooks (will
+% get moved eventually). The default hook setting is not good
+% enough when lists get suppported: we need to delay starting the
+% paragraph tagging if we still have to place the list label.
+% We therefore remove the existing hook data and replace it with an
+% augmented version (this will get combined eventually).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RemoveFromHook{para/begin}[tagpdf]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{para/begin}[tagpdf]{
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% if we are still waiting to typeset the list label we do nothing
+% (the paragraph tagging then happens when the list is finally
+% typeset).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \legacy_if:nF { @inlabel }
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, we start a \struct{text} tag structure but only if we are not
+% starting a paragraph immediately \emph{after} a list, in which
+% case we only start a new MC (because the \struct{text} tag is still open from
+% before the list --- one of the reasons why lists are always put
+% \enquote{inside} paragraphs.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n
+ { @endpe = \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe }{true}{false}
+ \on@line }
+ \legacy_if:nF { @endpe }
+ {
+ \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_begin_int
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl}
+ }
+ }
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_begin_int
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ P \on@line }
+ \tag_struct_begin:n
+ {
+ tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl
+ ,attribute-class=\l_tag_para_attr_class_tl
+ }
+ \__tag_check_para_begin_show:nn {green}{\PARALABEL}
+ \tag_mc_begin:n {}
+ }
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T {
+% \tagpdfsetup{add-new-tag={tag=text-unit,role=Part}}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RemoveFromHook{para/end}[tagpdf]
+\AddToHook{para/end}
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_end_int
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ /P \on@line }
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \__tag_check_para_end_show:nn {red}{}
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PARALABEL{NP-}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\para_end:}
+% If we see a \cs{par} in vmode and a \texttt{text-unit} is still open
+% we need to close that. For this we check if a request for
+% \text{@endpe} was made (but the \cs{par} redefinition got lost
+% due to (bad?) coding).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \para_end: {
+ \scan_stop:
+ \mode_if_horizontal:TF {
+ \mode_if_inner:F {
+ \tex_unskip:D
+ \hook_use:n{para/end}
+ \@kernel@after@para@end
+ \mode_if_horizontal:TF {
+ \if_int_compare:w 11 = \tex_lastnodetype:D
+ \tex_hskip:D \c_zero_dim
+ \fi:
+ \tex_par:D
+ \hook_use:n{para/after}
+ \@kernel@after@para@after
+ }
+ { \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{end}{horizontal} }
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ \__kernel_endpe_vmode: % should do nothing if no tagging
+ \tex_par:D
+ }
+}
+\cs_set_eq:NN \par \para_end:
+\cs_set_eq:NN \@@par \para_end:
+\cs_set_eq:NN \endgraf \para_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\begin}
+% We need to do a little more than canceling \texttt{@endpe} now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\begin[1]{%
+ \UseHook{env/#1/before}%
+ \@ifundefined{#1}%
+ {\def\reserved@a{\@latex@error{Environment #1 undefined}\@eha}}%
+ {\def\reserved@a{\def\@currenvir{#1}%
+ \edef\@currenvline{\on@line}%
+ \@execute@begin@hook{#1}%
+ \csname #1\endcsname}}%
+ \@ignorefalse
+ \begingroup
+ \__kernel_endpe_vmode:
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_endpe_vmode:}
+% Close an open \texttt{text-unit} if \texttt{@endpe} is true and we
+% are in vmode. Used in \cs{para_end:} and \cs{begin}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \__kernel_endpe_vmode: {
+ \if@endpe \ifvmode
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool
+ {
+ \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ }
+ \@endpefalse
+ }
+ \fi \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_after:}
+% If starting the text-unit/text tags got delayed because of a pending label we
+% have to do it after the label got typeset
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_list_label_after: {
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_bool
+ {
+ \bool_if:NF \l__tag_para_flattened_bool
+ {
+% \typeout{-->G3}
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_begin_int
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl}
+ }
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_begin_int
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{increment~ P \on@line }
+ \tag_struct_begin:n {
+ tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl
+ ,attribute-class=\l_tag_para_attr_class_tl
+ }
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_show_bool
+ {
+ \tag_mc_begin:n {artifact}
+ \llap {\color_select:n {blue}\tiny Li-\int_use:N \g__tag_para_begin_int \ }
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ }
+ \tag_mc_begin:n {tag=P}
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_inner_begin:}
+% Start a block that has an inner structure if it isn't also a list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_inner_begin: {
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=\l_@@_tag_inner_tag_tl}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_inner_end:}
+% End a block (which isn't also a list).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_inner_end: {
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{block-end \on@line}
+ \legacy_if:nT { @endpe }
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{close~ /text-unit \on@line}
+ \tagstructend
+ }
+ \tagstructend % end inner structure
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{List tags}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l__tag_L_tag_tl
+\tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_tag_tl {L}
+
+\tl_new:N\l__tag_L_attr_class_tl
+\tl_set:Nn \l__tag_L_attr_class_tl {list}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tag_if_active:T
+{
+ \tagpdfsetup
+ {
+ % default if unknown
+ newattribute = {list}{/O /List /ListNumbering/None},
+ newattribute = {itemize}{/O /List /ListNumbering/Unordered},
+ newattribute = {enumerate}{/O /List /ListNumbering/Ordered},
+ newattribute = {description}{/O /List /ListNumbering/Description},
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LItag{LI}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_begin:}
+% Start a list \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_begin: {
+ \tagstructbegin
+ {
+ tag=\l__tag_L_tag_tl
+ ,attribute-class=\l__tag_L_attr_class_tl
+ }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_item_begin:}
+% Start tagging a list item.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_item_begin: { \tagstructbegin{tag=\LItag} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_begin:}
+% A list label needs a \texttt{Lbl} structure tag and an MC.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_list_label_begin: {
+%
+% FMi: this needs a different logic to decide when to make the label
+% an artifact (after cleaning up the the \item code ), therefore
+% disabled for now
+% \tl_if_empty:oTF \@itemlabel
+% {
+% \tag_mc_begin:n {artifact}
+% }
+% {
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=Lbl}
+ \tagmcbegin{tag=Lbl}
+% }
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__kernel_list_label_end:}
+% And when we are done with the label we have to close the MC and
+% the \texttt{Lbl} structure. We then start the \texttt{LBody}. The
+% material inside will be \enquote{paragraph} text and the tagging
+% for that is handled by the normal para tagging.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \__kernel_list_label_end: {
+ \tagmcend % end mc-Lbl or artifact
+% FMi: unconditionally for now
+% \tl_if_empty:oF \@itemlabel
+ \tagstructend % end Lbl
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=\LBody}
+}
+\def\LBody{LBody}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_item_end:}
+% When a list item ends we have to close \texttt{LBody} and
+% \texttt{LI} but also a \struct{text} in the special case that the
+% item material ends in a list (identifiable via \texttt{@endpe}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_item_end: {
+ \legacy_if:nT { @endpe }
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int
+ \tagstructend % text-unit
+% \@@_debug_typeout:n{Structure-end~ P~ at~ item-end \on@line }
+ }
+ \tagstructend \tagstructend % end LBody, LI
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_list_end:}
+% Finally, at the list end we have to close the open
+% \texttt{LBody}, \texttt{LI}, \texttt{L}, and possibly a
+% \struct{text} if the last item ends with a list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set:Npn \@@_list_end: {
+ \legacy_if:nT { @endpe }
+ {
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_main_end_int
+ \tagstructend % text-unit
+ \@@_debug_typeout:n{Structure-end~ P~ at~ list-end \on@line }
+ }
+ \tagstructend\tagstructend % end LBody, LI
+ \tagstructend % end L
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% End of tagging related declarations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latex-lab>
+\ProvidesFile{block-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [\ltblocksdate\space \ltblocksversion\space
+ blockenv implementation]
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging}
+%</latex-lab>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{implementation}
+%
+%
+% \section{Documentation from first prototype implementations}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Open questions}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Existing questions --- moved to issues ---
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{Code cleanup}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Actually implement what's announced.
+%
+% \item Encapsulate most uses of \cs[no-index]{legacy_if\dots} into
+% commands with \texttt{expl3} syntax: we cannot rename these booleans
+% for compatibility reasons but we can make the code cleaner
+% nevertheless. --- made issue ---
+%
+% \item The \tn{topsep} and \tn{partopsep} business is tricky to
+% reproduce exactly (see \tn{@topsepadd} and \tn{@topsep}) because of
+% how it accumulates when lists are nested immediately.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Tasks}
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item Change author to LaTeX Team once it's nice enough to deserve
+% that label.
+%
+% \item Reproducing exactly the standard layouts and examples in the
+% \pkg{enumitem} documentation.
+%
+% \item Hooks, but do not duplicate those that already exist as
+% environment hooks. Hence, mostly around items.
+%
+% \item Customization and interaction with LDB:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Allow arbitrary nesting depth with automatically defined
+% styles for labels, counters etc.
+% \item Adapt everything to font size! (e.g. footnotes).
+% \item How to model the inheritance from trivlist to list to
+% enumerate?
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item Add key--value settings mimicking \pkg{enumitem}'s ability to
+% set any four of five horizontal parameters and deduce the fifth by
+% $\cs{leftmargin} + \cs{itemindent} = \cs{labelindent} +
+% \cs{labelwidth} + \cs{labelsep}$.
+%
+% \item Provide good ways to customize how overlong labels are dealt with.
+%
+% \item Use the \texttt{.aux} file.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Implement the \tn{ref} styles that \pkg{enumitem} provides.
+% \item Reverse enumerations, important in publication lists and the
+% like. Somehow avoid needing 3 compilations for references to
+% reverse enumerations to settle?
+% \item Ability to calculate \tn{labelwidth} from the label contents.
+% Share calculated parameters between multiple environments (cf.\
+% \texttt{resume} option).
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item Related to grabbing the whole list environment, and input syntax
+% variations:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Other layouts: tabular (see \pkg{listliketab} vs
+% \pkg{typed-checklist}), multicolumn and horizontally numbered (see
+% \pkg{tasks}), inline lists, runin lists in the easy case where
+% there is no intervening \tn{par}.
+% \item Formatting the item text in a
+% box or similar (requires grabbing the whole list).
+% \item Filtering which items to show: hide certain items according to
+% criteria (useful together with list reuse), see
+% \pkg{typed-checklist}.
+% \item Shorthands \tn{iitem} for automatic nested lists, or \cs{1},
+% \cs{2} etc from \pkg{outlines}.
+% \item Support markdown input like \pkg{asciilist}.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item Check interaction with \texttt{babel} options such as
+% \texttt{french} or \texttt{accadian} (see FrenchItemizeSpacing)
+%
+% \item RTL and vertical typesetting.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \section{Plan of attack of first prototype}
+%
+% Typesetting list environments involves a rather large number of
+% parameters. They can be affected by the context such as the total
+% list nesting level, the nesting level of the given type of list, and
+% the font size. An environment like \texttt{enumerate} has two main
+% aspects.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item It has a certain layout in the page, with vertical and
+% horizontal spacing around it. This type of layout is shared with
+% environments such as \texttt{quote}, \texttt{flushright}, or
+% \texttt{tabbing}. This common layout is implemented in \LaTeXe{}
+% through \cs{trivlist} (or \cs{list}).
+% \item It defines how each \cs{item} should be typeset: how to
+% construct the label, in particular the \texttt{counter} name, and
+% how to format the content of the item.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% This suggests defining two object types, \xt{block} and \xt{item}
+% covering these two aspects.\footnote{Possibly also \xt{endblock} to
+% deal with decorations at the end?} While the \xt{item} type will
+% perhaps have a single template, one could typeset a \xt{block} object
+% in several ways, for instance the standard \LaTeXe{} way or a fancy
+% colored box.
+%
+% The \xt{general} \xt{block} template should receive the following
+% parameters. The \xt{plain} \xt{block} template is a restricted
+% template that freezes all item-related parameters to dummy values
+% (\texttt{counter}, \texttt{start}, \texttt{resume},
+% \texttt{label-width}, \texttt{label-sep} and all \texttt{item-*}).
+% The \xt{list} \xt{block} template is a restricted template\footnote{A
+% better approach could be to have a notion of inheritance for object
+% types, so that we end up with two different \emph{object types}. Then
+% we can implement other template for the list object type: \xt{table}
+% for lists typeset as rows/columns of a table, \xt{inline} for lists
+% typeset in horizontal mode within a paragraph, and \xt{runin} for
+% run-in lists.} that omits the \texttt{heading} parameter and whose
+% default for \texttt{item-instance} is non-empty.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Structural parameters: the \texttt{heading} to place before,
+% \texttt{counter} name, \texttt{start} value, whether to
+% \texttt{resume} a previous list, and the \texttt{item-instance} (an
+% \xt{item} instance) to use when typesetting items.
+% \item Vertical spacing and penalties: \texttt{beginpenalty},
+% \texttt{beginsep}, \texttt{begin-par-skip}, \texttt{item-penalty},
+% \texttt{item-skip}, \texttt{item-par-skip}, \texttt{endpenalty},
+% \texttt{end-skip}, \texttt{end-par-skip}.
+% \item Horizontal spacing: \texttt{rightmargin}, \texttt{leftmargin},
+% \texttt{parindent}, \texttt{item-indent}, \texttt{label-width},
+% \texttt{label-sep}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% A \docclass should edit these templates (or define restricted
+% templates) to set up default values that depend on \tn{g_block_nesting_depth_int},
+% namely how many lists are nested overall.\footnote{Does
+% \pkg{xtemplate} provide a way to specify default values that are only
+% evaluated once an instance is used?} The document class should then
+% set up an instance of these templates for each environment, with
+% appropriate settings such as a \texttt{heading}, a suitable
+% \texttt{item-instance}, or making \texttt{margin-right} equal to
+% \texttt{margin-left} in a \texttt{quote} environment.
+%
+% The \xt{inline-list} \xt{block} template receives many fewer
+% parameters. Note that \texttt{beginsep}, \texttt{item-skip},
+% \texttt{end-skip} are now \emph{horizontal} skips.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Structural parameters: \texttt{counter}, \texttt{start},
+% \texttt{resume}, \texttt{item-instance}.
+% \item Spacing and penalties: \texttt{beginpenalty},
+% \texttt{beginsep}, \texttt{item-penalty}, \texttt{item-skip},
+% \texttt{endpenalty}, \texttt{end-skip}.
+% \item Horizontal spacing: \texttt{label-width}, \texttt{label-sep}.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% The \xt{std} \xt{item} template should receive the following
+% parameters. They depend on the type of list and its nesting level
+% among lists of such type, but typically not on the total nesting
+% level.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Counter name (\texttt{counter}), shared with the parent
+% \xt{list} \xt{block} template, but needed for incrementing.
+% \item Label construction: a function \texttt{counter-label} that
+% produces the label from the counter name, used if \tn{item} is given
+% without argument.
+% \item References: a function \texttt{counter-ref} for how the label
+% should be referred to when it is constructed from the counter,
+% \texttt{label-ref} and \texttt{label-autoref} used when \tn{item}
+% has an optional argument.
+% \item Label formatting: \texttt{label-format} function,
+% \texttt{label-strut} boolean.
+% \item Label alignment (\texttt{label-align}, \texttt{label-boxed},
+% \texttt{next-line}).
+% \item Content parameters: \texttt{text-font}.
+% \item A \texttt{compatibility} boolean that controls for instance
+% whether \tn{makelabel} is used.
+% \end{itemize}
+% The \docclass should set up an instance such as \xt{enumiii} for each
+% environment and nesting level.\footnote{This should be made easily
+% extendible to deeper levels.}
+%
+% A given environment will adjust some nesting levels, then call the
+% \xt{block} instance appropriate to the environment type, passing it
+% the \xt{item} instance appropriate to the environment and depth.
+% Additional context-dependence could be provided by \pkg{l3ldb}, but
+% the main context-dependence should not rely on it for simplicity
+% reasons and incidentally because \pkg{l3ldb} is not yet available.
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx
index 6fe7ff6955a..29261a594b6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-footnotes.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
%% File: latex-lab-footnotes.dtx
-% Copyright (C) 2022 The LaTeX Project
+% Copyright (C) 2022-2023 The LaTeX Project
%
% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
@@ -53,19 +53,19 @@
% offering configurable methods for layout and functionality
% adjustments that avoid overwriting each other when used in
% classes as well as in packages (as far as possible --- obviously
-% some adjustments are mutally exclusive). This is achieved by
-% providing a a larger number of hooks (for areas where different
+% some adjustments are mutually exclusive). This is achieved by
+% providing a larger number of hooks (for areas where different
% packages/classes can easily coexist with their adjustments) and a
% number of configuration points to which only one class or package
-% can write to successfully (in case of multiple changes the the
+% can write to successfully (in case of multiple changes the
% last one wins). The latter are for special functionality, e.g.,
% if footnote text is typeset as a single paragraph, it can't be configured
% the same time to be typeset vertically with one footnote below
% each other.
%
% The interfaces are set up to support tagged PDF, but in order
-% for this to work, all packages altering the fontnote setup should
-% use the inferfaces provided here and not do it through the
+% for this to work, all packages altering the footnote setup should
+% use the interfaces provided here and not do it through the
% legacy methods (though there is some support for the latter as
% well, but if will not work in a cases).
%
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@
% that was used by most document classes,
% but \cs{@makefntext} had to be defined in the class itself because
% the format didn't provide a default. As a result you will find
-% definitions for the latter in all document classes and defintions
+% definitions for the latter in all document classes and definitions
% for \cs{@makefnmark} only in very few.
%
% Furthermore, to enable special footnote layouts or provide
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
%
% In contrast the hooks are of interest to many classes to provide
% their layout alterations in a way that it works smoothly with
-% other packages handling aspects of foonote formatting.
+% other packages handling aspects of footnote formatting.
%
%
% \subsection{Formatting the mark in the main text}
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@
%
% Executed at the very beginning of \cs{footnotemark}. Currently
% there are two packages (\pkg{bibarts} and \pkg{chextras}) that
-% prepend material at this point (not ncessarily correctly, e.g.,
+% prepend material at this point (not necessarily correctly, e.g.,
% they do not all check that they are in horizontal mode).
%
% This hook is paired with hook \hook{fnmark/after}.
@@ -163,15 +163,15 @@
% \item[\hook{fnmark/begin}]
%
% This hook is executed directly in front of the typeset mark.
-% This is the place where \pkg{hyperref} adds part of its code,
-% i.e., after the \cs{nobreak} mentioned above. With a closer
-% integration of \pkg{hyperref} this hook may not be necessary at
-% all.
+% This is the place where \pkg{hyperref} would have added
+% part of its code, i.e., after the \cs{nobreak} mentioned above.
+% With the integration of hyperlinks in the tagging code
+% this hook may not be necessary at all.
%
% \item[\hook{fnmark/end}]
%
% This hook is executed directly after the typeset mark. It is
-% used by \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{memhfixc}, \pkg{scrlttr2}, and
+% used by \pkg{memhfixc}, \pkg{scrlttr2}, and
% \pkg{footmisc}. Used, for example, to implement support for
% multiple marks in succession.
%
@@ -227,9 +227,9 @@
% \item[\cs{@footnotetext@cfgpointiii} (no argument)]
%
% By default this configuration point adds a strut to the
-% footnote material. so that consecutive footnotes are properly
+% footnote material so that consecutive footnotes are properly
% spaced vertically. In some use cases this is not appropriate
-% (e.g., when running all footnotes s a single paragraph) and so
+% (e.g., when running all footnotes as a single paragraph) and so
% this configuration point can cancel the action or do something
% else instead.
%
@@ -261,17 +261,18 @@
%
% If tagging is produced this configuration point is also
% responsible for surrounding the mark with the appropriate tags
-% marking the mark as an Lbl. It does this using the command \cs{tag@FELbl}.
+% marking the mark as an Lbl. It does this using the command
+% \cs{tag@FENoteLbl}.
%
% \item[\cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii} (1 argument)]
%
% This configuration point manages the formatting of the footnote
-% text once the mark has been typeset.
+% text once the mark has been typeset.
%
% If tagging is produced this configuration point is also
% responsible for surrounding the mark with the appropriate tags
% marking the mark as an MC of type FENote. It does this using
-% the command \cs{tag@FENote}.
+% the command \cs{tag@FENotetext}.
%
% \end{description}
%
@@ -335,7 +336,7 @@
%
% At the very end of \cs{footnotetext} we execute the hook
% \hook{fntext/after} which is a reversed hook paired with
-% \hook{fntext/before}. Some packages, e.g., \pkg{linuex}, have
+% \hook{fntext/before}. Some packages, e.g., \pkg{linguex}, have
% code in that position.
%
% \end{description}
@@ -346,7 +347,7 @@
% \subsubsection{Additional configuration possibilities}
%
% The formatting of the footnote mark in front of the footnote
-% texts is influenced by the setting of the dimen parameter
+% text is influenced by the setting of the dimen parameter
% \cs{footnotemargin}. By default its value is 1.8em in the current
% text font (or \texttt{-}\cs{maxdimen} when the para option is
% chosen). The following rules apply:
@@ -381,7 +382,247 @@
% \end{itemize}
%
%
-% \section{Tagging support}
+% \section{Tagging and hyperlinking support}
+%
+% Footnotes consist of a \emph{footnotemark} (short: mark) that is typically placed in the text
+% as a superscript number like this\footnotemark[1], and a \emph{footnotetext}
+% (short: note) that is placed at the bottom of the page.
+% The \emph{footnotetext} normally repeats at the begin the mark as a visual clue.
+%
+% Tagging (and hyperlinking) has to connect the mark with the note.
+% For the tagging code, we assume that every mark has exactly one associated note,
+% and that every note is associated to at least one mark
+% and can have more associated marks.
+%
+% The mark doesn't need to be visible, e.g. the typesetted
+% mark\textsuperscript{1--3} denotes three marks, where the second is invisible.
+% Tagging should produce here probably three \texttt{Lbl} structures
+% (one without content), and an artifact for the range marker.
+% If such a range is used, links can only point to the notes 1 and 3 and
+% one has to suppress the linking for the second mark.
+% This means that links and tagging are also related
+% to the actual formatting of the footnote mark.
+% In the following this problem is mostly ignored for now, but
+% should not be forgotten and handled later.
+%
+% \subsection{Technical details for the tagging}
+%
+% The \emph{footnotemark} should create a \texttt{/Lbl} structure\footnote{to make it easier
+% to identify the role we use \texttt{/footnotemark} which we rolemap to \texttt{/Lbl}} that should contain a \texttt{/Ref} entry pointing
+% to the structure of the \emph{footnotetext}.
+%
+% The \emph{footnotetext} should create a \texttt{/FENote}\footnote{We tag it as \texttt{/footnote} and role map it.}
+% structure with a \texttt{/Ref}
+% entry pointing to the structures of \emph{all} marks related to the note.
+% The mark at the begin of the
+% note is in a \texttt{/Lbl}\footnote{We tag it as \texttt{/footnotelabel}.}
+% structure but has to fulfil no special requirements.
+%
+% Structure objects and the underlying properties used by the tagging
+% code are initialized when the structure is opened. This means that one can not
+% directly add data to a future structure
+% but as structure objects are written at the end of the document it is
+% possible to update \texttt{/Ref} entries in an end document hook.
+%
+%
+% So tagging has to solve two problems:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item the mark and the footnote text must be surrounded by the correct structure
+% and marked content commands. This is not trivial
+% as there are various layouts (bottom, marginpar, minipage) and the tagging
+% from the automatic paratagging must be taken into account if one want to avoid
+% faulty nesting.
+%
+% \item It must detect which marks are related to which notes
+% so that it can setup the \texttt{/Ref} cross-references.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Requirements for links}
+%
+% Links should go from the mark to the note. Sometimes it has been requested
+% that links go back too, but as there
+% can be more than one mark connected to a note it is not clear how to decide to which mark it should go.
+% Using the keys from the PDF viewer to go back is normally better.
+%
+% Links are closely related to the references stored in the \texttt{/Ref}
+% entry of a mark and so are handled in the code together with them.
+% But there are subtle technical differences to take care of
+% as links and destinations are whatsits and so must be created at the correct time.
+%
+% It should be possible to suppress the links both globally and locally.\footnote{
+% Currently hyperref only offers the option to suppress the
+% footnote links globally
+% with the option \texttt{hyperfootnotes=false}. To suppress them locally
+% only the \texttt{NoHyper} environment is provided.}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The algorithmus to connect marks and notes}
+%
+%
+% The connection is made by comparing the value of \cs{@thefnmark}.
+%
+% The standard mark commands (\cs{footnotemark} and \cs{footnote})
+% store the current value of \cs{@thefnmark}
+% with their own structure number as a key in a property.
+%
+% A following \cs{footnotetext} compares its own \cs{@thefnmark} with the values in
+% the prop. If there is a match it stores the structure numbers and removes the entries
+% from the properties (so in a normal document the property will never contain more than
+% a few entries).
+%
+% This works well as long as the \cs{footnotemark} commands are issued before the \cs{footnotetext} and
+% as long as nothing unusual is done to \cs{@thefnmark}.
+% It also works if a document uses more than one footnote series as long as they have distinct numbering
+% systems, but in case a distinction is needed it is possible to define
+% a new data structure and to switch locally to use this
+% container. The following three commands are used for this.
+%
+% The default property uses the name \texttt{default}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\fnote_new:nn}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{fnote_new:nn}\Arg{name}\Arg{key/value option}
+% \end{syntax}
+%
+% This commands set up the needed data structure. Currently this only
+% consists of a property which is used to store and manage the mark values.
+% There are no options yet.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\fnote_mark_gput:nn,\fnote_mark_gput:no,\fnote_mark_gput:oo}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{fnote_mark_gput:nn}\Arg{mark}\Arg{footnote type name}
+% \end{syntax}
+% This command stores the current structure number as key and the \meta{mark} as
+% value in the property associated with the \meta{footnote type name}
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\fnote_mark_gpop:nnN}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{fnote_mark_gpop:nnN}\Arg{mark}\Arg{footnote type name}\meta{sequence}
+% \end{syntax}
+% This command stores the keys/structure numbers whose value are \meta{mark} in the
+% property associated with \meta{footnote type name} in the \meta{sequence}
+% and then remove them from the property. The content of the sequence can then be
+% used to create link targets and references.
+% \end{function}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{footref}}
+%
+% \cs{footref} use internally the same command to set the mark as \cs{footnotemark}, it only
+% defines \cs{@thefnmark} differently. This \cs{@thefnmark} is not suitable for the method described
+% above, as it contains a reference command it can't be used to match a note, also \cs{footref} can
+% be used after the note has already been set. \cs{footref} disables therefore the automatic detection.
+%
+% Instead the \cs{label} command is (currently with the help of a hook from the \texttt{nameref} package)
+% extended in the \cs{footnotetext} command to also store the structure number and \cs{footref} retrieves this
+% number to setup the reference and the link.
+%
+% The structure related to the \cs{footref} is added to the end of the \texttt{/Ref} array of the note and so the
+% \texttt{/Ref} array doesn't necessarly reflect the order of the marks in the document. It would probably
+% be possible to change this, but it is not clear if it actually matters and so it worth the additional coding
+% and processing.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{footnotemark} after \cs{footnotetext}}
+%
+% The automatic detection doesn't work if a \cs{footnotemark} is issued after
+% the \cs{footnotetext} it refers to. There will be no error, but neither the link nor
+% the \texttt{/Ref} will connect both.
+%
+% The simple way to handle this is to use a label and \cs{footref}:
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \footnotetext{\label{fn:a}text} ... \footref{fn:a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% An alternative would be to extend the syntax of \cs{footnotemark} and
+% \cs{footnotetext} to allow to add a label which can then be used.
+% For example
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \footnotetext[label=fn:a]{text} ... \footnotemark[label=fn:a]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% As both have already an optional argument, that requires the optional argument extension.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Links}
+%
+% The structure numbers detected for the \texttt{/Ref} are also used for links:
+% even if tagging is not activated the tagging commands are defined through
+% the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package
+% and the structure commands increase the structure counter and this info can be used.
+%
+% A \cs{footnotetext} creates a bunch of destinations (in most cases this sums up to
+% two destinations): one for every structure number in the \texttt{/Ref} (used as target
+% by the mark commands) and one for the structure number of the footnotetest itself
+% (used as target by \cs{footref}s commands).
+%
+% \subsection{Implementation details}
+%
+% \subsection{Handling the mark}
+%
+% The mark in the text is handled by redefining the kernel configuration point
+% \cs{@kernel@process@makefnmark} to \cs{tag@FEMark}.
+% It takes one argument, \cs{@makefnmark}, the command which formats the
+% mark, and surrounds it by link and tagging commands.
+% At the point where \cs{@kernel@process@makefnmark} is issued \cs{@thefnmark} has already been
+% defined and can be used to setup the reference detections.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Handling the footnotetext}
+%
+% The main part is done by redefining \cs{@kernel@process@footnotetext}. This configuration point takes two arguments, \cs{@footnotetext@cfgpoint} (by default \verb+\insert\footins+) and as second argument lots of code related to typesetting the notemark and the footnote text with the actual content of the footnote text somewhere in the middle.
+%
+% The redefinition of \cs{@kernel@process@footnotetext} surrounds the content with the structure command
+% and tries to detect to which mark the note is related.
+%
+% The actual typesetting of the note text is done
+% by \cs{@makefntext}/\cs{fnote_makefntext:n}. In the new implementation this contains two configuration
+% points, \cs{@makefntext@cfgpoint} and \cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii}. These are redefined to add the tagging commands around note mark and note text.
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes in minipages}
+%
+% In minipages the \cs{footnote} command uses a special marker
+% (small italic letters by default) and puts the
+% footnote text at the bottom of the box. The \cs{footnotemark}
+% command uses the standard footnote counter and marker (and so typically
+% creates a superscript number).
+% It is meant to be used with a \cs{footnotetext} \emph{outside}
+% the minipage to create a footnote mark which refers to a footnote text
+% at the bottom of the page.
+% This means to repeat a footnote marker in a minipage you should use the \cs{footref} command.
+%
+% Tagging works quite similar to normal footnotes if the new definition is used
+% and if the minipage code is changed to use the new configuration point.
+% The main problem here is currently the tagging of the minipage itself.
+%
+% \section{TODOs}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item tagging destroys footnotes directly following the text with pdflatex.
+%
+% \item there is a dependency on nameref as it provides the hook in \cs{label}
+% used by the \cs{footref} code.
+%
+% \item there is a dependency to etoolbox as we patch \cs{\@iiiminipage}
+%
+% \item Special formatting of footnote marks in the text, e.g. if ranges or commas are
+% used require special care as they should normally mark up such text as artifacts and
+% perhaps have to insert empty structures to represent an invisible mark. This must be coordinated
+% with the relevant packages and classes.
+%
+% \item manyfoot doesn't work correctly and must be analyzed.
+%
+% \item Check if additional kernel configuration points are needed/possible
+% to avoid the redefinitions of \cs{@makefntext@cfgpoint} and \cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii}.
+%
+% \item \pkg{memoir} is not supported at all and errors when the code tries to patch
+% \cs{@makefntext}.
+% \end{itemize}
%
% \emph{To be documented}
%
@@ -403,46 +644,171 @@
% \subsection{File declaration}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-footnotes.ltx}
- [2022-07-22 v0.6b changes to the footnote interfaces]
+ [2023-02-04 v0.7 changes to the footnote interfaces]
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \subsection{code not fully handled yet}
% \begin{macrocode}
-
+%
% latex.ltx
+% not looked at yet
+% \@mpfootnotetext is probably no longer needed, or only to support other
+% classes and package. See below about the minipage code.
+%
+% \long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
+% \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+% \unvbox\@mpfootins
+% \reset@font\footnotesize
+% \hsize\columnwidth
+% \@parboxrestore
+% \def\@currentcounter{mpfootnote}%
+% \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+% {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+% \color@begingroup
+% \@makefntext{%
+% \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+% \par
+% \color@endgroup}}
+% ========
+% used by the minipage footnote code.
+%
+% \def\@mpfn{footnote}
+% \def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
+% =========
+% this perhaps need some configuration options.
+%
+%\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
+%
+% =========
+%% alterations not covered:
+%
+% ./arabtex/afoot.sty --- too different (and probably too old)
+%
+% =====
+% alterations of footnotetext not covered:
+%
+% ./revtex4-1/revtex4-1.cls ./revtex/ltxutil.sty ./revtex/revtex4-2.cls ... (need analysis)
+% ./bigfoot/bigfoot.sty
+%
+% memoir needs checking too
+%
+% =====
+%
+% use of kerns to mark h-mode positions (unit sp)
+%
+% 1 = CJK
+% 2 = CJK
+% 3 = multiple footnotes (footmisc, koma, eledmac, tufte, memoir,
+% parnotes, sidenotes)
+% 3 = outer kern in letter spacing (letterspace)
+% 3 = beginning of list (examdesign.cls)
+% 4 = CJK pigin
+% 5 = CJK ruby
- % not looked at yet
-
-\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \def\@currentcounter{mpfootnote}%
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \par
- \color@endgroup}}
-
-
-\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
-
-
-
-\def\@mpfn{footnote}
-\def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
-
-
-
+% 1-4 = polyglossia for korean
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
%-------------------------------------
-
-
+% \begin{macrocode}
\ExplSyntaxOn
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Temporary variables}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prop_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_prop
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Public variables}
+%
+% A footnote mark will store its structure number (key) and the
+% expanded \cs{@thefnmark} in this prop so
+% that a following note can retrieve this info
+% if needed. It is possible to use more than one footnote series (type)
+% if needed (if different footnotes/note use the same
+% numbering system).
+% If this command is changed an accompanying property must be created
+% \begin{NOTE}{UF}
+% TODO: interface to create the property.\\
+% TODO: check and decide about the name of the tl
+% \end{NOTE}
+% \begin{macro}{\l_fnote_type_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_fnote_type_tl
+\tl_set:Nn \l_fnote_type_tl {default}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% It must be possible to suppress the hyperlinking, both locally
+% and globally. hyperref's hyperfootnotes option should set the boolean.
+% \begin{macro}{\l_fnote_link_bool}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_fnote_link_bool
+\bool_set_true:N \l_fnote_link_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% A hyperlink should have an changeable link type. This can
+% be e.g. used to change the color or the border.
+% \begin{macro}{\l_fnote_link_type_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_fnote_link_type_tl
+\tl_set:Nn \l_fnote_link_type_tl {link}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Internal variables}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_linktarget_tl}
+% This command stores the name of a linktarget/destination
+% when needed
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_linktarget_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_currentlabel_tl}
+% This command is used to pass a label name around.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_currentlabel_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
-
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_currentrefs_seq}
+% This sequence stores the list of reference of a note
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\seq_new:N \l_@@_currentrefs_seq
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The connection between the mark(s) in the text and the note
+% is either deduced automatically or done through an label.
+% The default is automatic, but we must be able to suppress it. For this we use a boolean.
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_autodetect_bool}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool
+\bool_set_true:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% This is used to pass the structure number of the note around, e.g.
+% to a label inside the note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_currentstruct_tl
+\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_currentstruct_tl {1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Variants}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \ref_label:nn { Vn }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \ref_value:nn { Vn }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \prop_gput:Nnn {cxn}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \hook_gput_code:nnn{nne}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tag_struct_use:n {e}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Updating \cs{@thefnmark}}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_step_fnmark:nn}
+% This command updates \cs{@thefnmark}. The first argument
+% is an optional integer expression, the second a counter name.
+% If the optional argument is not given it steps the counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_step_fnmark:nn #1#2 {
\tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1}
{
@@ -463,7 +829,12 @@
\group_end:
}
}
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_set_fnmark:nn}
+% This is similar to the previous command, but it doesn't step the
+% counter but use the current value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_set_fnmark:nn #1#2 {
\tl_if_novalue:nTF {#1}
{
@@ -476,25 +847,40 @@
\group_end:
}
}
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-% the debugging code is just temp
-\bool_new:N \g_fnote_debug_bool
-\bool_gset_true:N \g_fnote_debug_bool % for now we have debugging turned on by default
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Hooks}
+%
+% Hooks in the footnotemark command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\NewMirroredHookPair{fnmark/before}{fnmark/after}
\NewHook{fnmark}
\NewHook{fnmark/begin}
\NewHook{fnmark/end}
-
-
-\cs_new:Npn \@@_debug_footnotemark: {
- \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Hooks in the footnotetext command
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NewMirroredHookPair{fntext/before}{fntext/after}
+\NewHook{fntext}
+\NewHook{fntext/para}
+\NewHook{fntext/begin}
+\NewHook{fntext/end}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Debugging code}
+% the debugging code is just temporary
+%
+% For now we have debugging turned on by default
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \g_fnote_debug_bool
+\bool_gset_true:N \g_fnote_debug_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We log the hooks in the footnote mark command, but only once
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_debug_footnotemark:
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool
{
\LogHook{fnmark/before}
\LogHook{fnmark}
@@ -503,9 +889,38 @@
\LogHook{fnmark/after}
\cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_debug_footnotemark: \prg_do_nothing:
}
-}
-
-
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Similar for the footnotetext
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_debug_footnotetext:
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool
+ {
+ \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpoint
+ \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointii
+ \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiii
+ \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiv
+ \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpoint
+ \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpointii
+ \LogHook{fntext/before}
+ \LogHook{fntext}
+ \LogHook{fntext/para}
+ \LogHook{fntext/begin}
+ \LogHook{fntext/end}
+ \LogHook{fntext/after}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Show the info only once (if at all).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_debug_footnotetext: \prg_do_nothing:
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The new \cs{@footnotemark} command}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_footnotemark:}
+% This is the main command which will replace \cs{@footnotemark}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_footnotemark: {
\@@_debug_footnotemark:
%-------
@@ -535,17 +950,20 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% If a footnote mark is placed by its own then it should finish by
% executing \hook{fnmark/end}, resetting the space factor, and
-% finishing with \hook{fnmark/after}. However, inf a complete
+% finishing with \hook{fnmark/after}. However, in a complete
% footnote these actions have to happen only after we have handled
-% the footnote text (e.g., by placing it into an \cs{insert}. In
+% the footnote text (e.g., by placing it into an \cs{insert}). In
% such a situation \cs{_@@_footmark_finish:} below does nothing
% and the action is carried out later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_footnotemark_finish:
}
-
-
-\cs_new:Npn \@@_finish: {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_finish:,\@@_footnotemark_finish:}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_finish: {
% hyperref.sty
% memhfixc.sty --- could move fnmark/after
% scrlttr2.cls --- could vanish if footmisc uses a hook
@@ -561,57 +979,30 @@
%-------
}
-
\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \@@_finish:
-
-
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@process@makefnmark}
% Not a public config point but the kernel hook to add tagging
+% \begin{macrocode}
\def \@kernel@process@makefnmark { }
-
-
-% alterations not covered:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
-% ./arabtex/afoot.sty --- too different (and probably too old)
-
-
-% Provide the name \LaTeXe{} is used to.
-
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotemark}
+% At last provide the name \LaTeXe{} is used to.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotemark \fnote_footnotemark:
-
-
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-\NewMirroredHookPair{fntext/before}{fntext/after}
-\NewHook{fntext}
-\NewHook{fntext/para}
-\NewHook{fntext/begin}
-\NewHook{fntext/end}
-
-
-\cs_new:Npn \@@_debug_footnotetext: {
- \bool_if:NT \g_fnote_debug_bool
- {
- \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpoint
- \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointii
- \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiii
- \cs_log:N\@footnotetext@cfgpointiv
- \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpoint
- \cs_log:N\@makefntext@cfgpointii
- \LogHook{fntext/before}
- \LogHook{fntext}
- \LogHook{fntext/para}
- \LogHook{fntext/begin}
- \LogHook{fntext/end}
- \LogHook{fntext/after}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Show the info only once (if at all).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The new \cs{@footnotetext} command}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_footnotetext:n}
% \begin{macrocode}
- \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_debug_footnotetext: \prg_do_nothing:
- }
- }
-
\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_footnotetext:n #1 {
\@@_debug_footnotetext:
%-------
@@ -690,55 +1081,75 @@
\UseHook{fntext/after}
%-------
}
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpoint}
% default for config point (1 arg)
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpoint { \insert\footins }
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpointii}
% default for config point (1 arg)
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpointii { \@makefntext }
-
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpointiii}
% default for config point (0 args)
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpointiii { \rule\z@\footnotesep }
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext@cfgpointiv}
% default for config point (0 args)
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@footnotetext@cfgpointiv { \@finalstrut\strutbox }
-
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@kernel@process@footnotetext}
% kernel hook for tagging (2 args)
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@process@footnotetext {}
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% Provide the name \LaTeXe{} is used to and do this unconditionally
% (no patching of class code if any). This means that if a class provides it own
% definition that gets lost and if necessary needs to be handled
-% with firstaid (or updating of the class.
-
-\AddToHook{begindocument}{
- \cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotetext \fnote_footnotetext:n
-}
-
-% alterations not covered:
+% with firstaid (or updating of the class).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument}
+ {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotetext \fnote_footnotetext:n
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
%
-% ./revtex4-1/revtex4-1.cls ./revtex/ltxutil.sty ./revtex/revtex4-2.cls ... (need analysis)
-% ./bigfoot/bigfoot.sty
-
-
-
-% \footnotemargin is the logic implemented by footmisc. Perhaps we
+% \subsection{The new \cs{@makefntext} command}
+%
+% \cs{footnotemargin} is the logic implemented by footmisc. Perhaps we
% don't want to do this like that in the kernel but for now I have
% used this interface unchanged.
-
-
+% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\footnotemargin
\footnotemargin\maxdimen % no value given
-\AtBeginDocument{
- \ifdim \footnotemargin=\maxdimen
- \setlength\footnotemargin{1.8em}
- \fi
-}
-
+\AtBeginDocument
+ {
+ \ifdim \footnotemargin=\maxdimen
+ \setlength\footnotemargin{1.8em}
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_makefntext:n}
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_makefntext:n #1 {
% \end{macrocode}
% Some classes in their redefinition for \cs{@makefntext} have
@@ -765,36 +1176,45 @@
\@makefntext@cfgpointii
{ #1 }
}
-
-
-
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext@cfgpoint}
% default for config point (1 arg)
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpoint { \noindent }
-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext@cfgpointii}
% default for config point (1 arg)
+% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpointii #1 { #1 }
% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
+% \subsubsection{Making documents use the new \cs{@makefntext}}
%
+% If the definition for \cs{@makefntext} is that of the standard
+% classes then replace it with \cs{fnote_makefntext:n}, otherwise
+% try to patch the definition.
%
-% If the definition for \cs{@makefntext} is that of the standard
-% classes then replace it with \cs{fnote_makefntext:n}, otherwise
-% try to patch the definition.
+% Here is the definition the way it is in
+% \texttt{classes.dtx}. Notice that (for saving space) there is no
+% space after \texttt{em} to terminate the assignment. We need to
+% mimic that, otherwise a test would return false even if the
+% definition has not been modified.
%
-% Here is the the definition the way it is in
-% \texttt{classes.dtx}. Notice that (for saving space) there is no
-% space after \texttt{em} to terminate the assignment. We need to
-% mimic that, otherwise a test would return false even if the
-% definition has not been modified.
%
+% \begin{macro}{\old@std@class@makefntext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\old@std@class@makefntext[1]{%
\parindent 1em%
\noindent
\hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
-
% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% Here is the messy code for patching. Note that this is only there
% to help classes along that aren't updated yet so it does some
% minimal patching to hopefully add configuration points in the
@@ -822,7 +1242,6 @@
% \cs{@makefnmark} without surrounding it in a box and if that
% fails it gives up with an \cs{ERROR} (which needs to get a proper definition).
% \begin{macrocode}
-
\tl_new:N \l_@@_patch_tl
\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_tmp:w \ERROR
@@ -853,6 +1272,7 @@
%\begin{verbatim}
% AAA \@makefntext@processX { \hbox BBB }
%\end{verbatim}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new:Npn \@@_patch_hbox:w #1 \hbox #2 #
{ \exp_stop_f: #1 \@makefntext@processX { \hbox #2 } }
@@ -869,25 +1289,27 @@
% different structure so this is a simple reshuffling. Would be
% better if we can patch the right structure in directly, but I'm
% not a patch person, so this is the simple way out for now:
-%
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new:Npn \@makefntext@processX #1#2{\@makefntext@cfgpoint{#1{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
+%
% At \verb=\begin{document}= check if the current definition is
% that of the standard classes and if so replace it by
% \cs{fnote_makefntext:n} otherwise try and patch the definition
% using the approach above.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\AddToHook{begindocument}{
- \cs_if_eq:NNTF \@makefntext \old@std@class@makefntext
- {
- \cs_set_eq:NN \@makefntext \fnote_makefntext:n
- }
- {
- \@@_patch:
- }
-}
+\AddToHook{begindocument}
+ {
+ \cs_if_eq:NNTF \@makefntext \old@std@class@makefntext
+ {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@makefntext \fnote_makefntext:n
+ }
+ {
+ \@@_patch:
+ }
+ }
% possibly add the following to check for multiple \hbox in
@@ -898,63 +1320,112 @@
%
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \subsection{Document-level commands}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotetext}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotetext {om}
+ {
+ \fnote_set_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn
+ \@footnotetext {#2}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Document-level commands}
-%
-% \changes{v0.6b}{2022/07/22}{Make mandatory arguments of \cs{footnote}
-% and \cs{footnotetext} long (gh863)}
+% \begin{macro}{\footnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnote {om}
+ {
+ \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \prg_do_nothing:
+ \@footnotemark
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \@@_finish:
+ \@footnotetext {#2}
+ \@@_footnotemark_finish:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
-\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotetext {o+m} {
- \fnote_set_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn
- \@footnotetext {#2}
-}
-
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-
-\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnote {o+m} {
- \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} \@mpfn
- \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \prg_do_nothing:
- \@footnotemark
- \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_footnotemark_finish: \@@_finish:
- \@footnotetext {#2}
- \@@_footnotemark_finish:
-}
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-
-\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotemark {o} {
- \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} { footnote }
- \@footnotemark
-}
-
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-\DeclareDocumentCommand\footref {m}{%
- \begingroup
- \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}%
- \endgroup
- \@footnotemark
-}
-
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotemark}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareDocumentCommand\footnotemark {o}
+ {
+ \fnote_step_fnmark:nn {#1} { footnote }
+ \@footnotemark
+ }
% \end{macrocode}
-%
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\footref}
+% \cs{footref} used the starred \cs{ref} in \cs{@thefnmark}
+% as the linking is handled by the tagging code inside
+% the \cs{@footnotemark}.
+% \cs{footref} should not try to link to its related related
+% note automatically but should instead use the label.
+% This is passed to \cs{@footnotemark} through
+% \cs{l__fnote_currentlabel_tl}.
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<@@=>
+\DeclareDocumentCommand\footref {m}
+ {
+ \begingroup
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref*{#1}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_currentlabel_tl {#1}
+ \@footnotemark
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_autodetect_bool
+ }
% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
%
+% \subsection{Firstaid for packages and classes}
%
+% \subsection{Kernel patches}
+% Tagging of footnotes in minipages require a change in the minipage commands
+% We define at first a local configuration command for minipage footnotes.
%
+% TODO remove the dependency to etoolbox, and need for the patch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@mpfootnotetext@cfgpoint #1
+ {
+ \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@mpfootins
+ #1
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we patch \cs{@iiiminipage}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+\patchcmd\@iiiminipage
+ {\let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext}
+ {\let\@footnotetext@cfgpoint\@mpfootnotetext@cfgpoint}
+ {}{\ERROR}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{memoir}}
+% The \pkg{memoir} class redefines various internal commands to inject its
+% hooks and addtional code. The following reinstates the kernel command and
+% so probably breaks various options of \pkg{memoir}, but without the
+% changes it errors anyway. The \pkg{footmisc} package should be used to change
+% for example to para footnotes.
%
-% \subsection{Firstaid for packages and classes}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{class/memoir/before}
+ { \let\new@std@class@makecol\@makecol }
+\AddToHook{class/memoir/after}
+ {
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@footnotemark \fnote_footnotemark:
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@makefntext\old@std@class@makefntext
+ \cs_set_eq:NN \@makecol\new@std@class@makecol
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\pkg{setspace}}
%
@@ -967,156 +1438,410 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
-%
-%
% \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}}
%
-% Prevent hyperref from redefining footnote stuff --- this is a
-% temp solution.
+% hyperref has a hook which allows to disable its footnote
+% related patches. As we will handle links directly in the code
+% this is used.
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after}{
- \let\H@@footnotetext\fnote_footnotetext:n
- \let\H@@footnotemark\fnote_footnotemark:
- \let \@footnotetext \fnote_footnotetext:n
- \let \@footnotemark \fnote_footnotemark:
-}
-
-
-
+\def\hyper@nopatch@footnote{}
% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Stuff that needs cleanup and documentation}
-%
+% We use the hyperref commands for now for links. To avoid
+% to have to test for hyperref we provide dummies.
+% TODO consider to use specials to get similar spacing.
% \begin{macrocode}
-
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-% use of kerns to mark h-mode positions (unit sp)
+\AtBeginDocument
+ {
+ \providecommand\hyper@linkstart{\@gobbletwo}
+ \providecommand\hyper@linkend{\@empty}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
%
-% 1 = CJK
-% 2 = CJK
-% 3 = multiple footnotes (footmisc, koma, eledmac, tufte, memoir,
-% parnotes, sidenotes)
-% 3 = outer kern in letter spacing (letterspace)
-% 3 = beginning of list (examdesign.cls)
-% 4 = CJK pigin
-% 5 = CJK ruby
-
-% 1-4 = polyglossia for korean
-
-%-------------------------------------
-
-
-
-%-------------------------------------
-% Tagging
-%-------------------------------------
-
-% hyperref support only when loaded (improve integration)
-
-\newcounter{absfootnote}
-\AddToHook{fnmark/begin}{\stepcounter{absfootnote}} % too simple (fails with opt args)
-
-
-
-% this is rubbish and should be handled better:
-
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag_if_loaded:TF { \cs_if_exist:NTF \tag_struct_begin:n }
-
-
-
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FEMark #1 {
- \tag_if_loaded:TF
+% It must be possible to suppress the hyperlinking, both locally
+% and globally. hyperref should set the boolean \cs{l_fnote_link_bool}.
+% For now we test for the hyperref boolean (so it can be suppressed only globally).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument
+ {
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}
{
- \tag_mc_end_push:
- \exp_args:Nx
- \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl,ref=fn.\the\c@absfootnote}
- \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Lbl}
- \IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{ \hyper@linkstart
- {link}{fn.\the\c@absfootnote} }{}
- #1
- \IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{ \hyper@linkend }{}
- \tag_mc_end:
- \tag_struct_end:
- \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}
+ \legacy_if:nF{Hy@hyperfootnotes}{\bool_set_false:N \l_fnote_link_bool}
}
- { #1 }
-}
-
-% to be done next round around:
+ {
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_fnote_link_bool
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \the\c@absfootnote should be replaced directly by some command with default meaning
-% \the\c@absfootnote so that the actual reference can be changed from the outside.
+% \subsection{Tagging and hyperlink code}
+% \subsubsection{Rolemap for structure tags}
+% We use role-mapping to get more speaking names
+% in the PDF and so ease debugging. These names are already
+% provided by tagpdf directly.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Extending the label system}
+% For \cs{footref} and (perhaps later for labeled footnotes)
+% we must extend the label system.
+% Beside the normal values we also need the structure number of the note.
+% We use the \pkg{nameref} hook until latex provides a hook for its label.
+% At first we define a suitable attribute, it uses as value the structure
+% number of the note as stored in \cs{l__fnote_currentstruct_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ref_attribute_gset:nnnn {fnote/struct}{1}{now}{\l_@@_currentstruct_tl}
+% \end{macrocode}
%
-% there are several instances that are curently hardwired.
-
-\cs_set_eq:NN \@kernel@process@makefnmark \tag@FEMark
-
-
-
-% kernel hook for tagging (2 args)
-\cs_set:Npn \@kernel@process@footnotetext #1#2 {
- \tag_if_loaded:TF
+% We add a hook to the \pkg{nameref} hook. By default it does nothing
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_label_hook:}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_label_hook: {}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}
+ {
+ \RequirePackage{nameref}
+ \g@addto@macro\label@hook
+ {
+ \@@_label_hook:
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Inside a footnotetext we change the hook to store the structure number too.
+% nameref provides the name of label in \cs{label@name}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{fntext/begin}
+ {
+ \cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_label_hook:
{
- \tag_mc_end_push:
- \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=FENote,label=fn.\the\c@absfootnote }
- #1 {#2}
- \tag_struct_end:
- \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}
+ \ref_label:Vn \label@name {fnote/struct}
}
- { #1 {#2} }
-}
-
-
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Storing and retrieving reference data}
+% To establish the connection between a mark and a note
+% the mark has to store its representation, and the
+% note has to analyse the stored representations to get
+% the structure numbers of its mark. This is done
+% with the public function to allow similar systems (e.g.
+% tabular notes, other footnote series) to make use of this.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_new:nn}
+% This sets up a new footnote type, the first argument
+% is the name, the second is meant for options. Currently
+% it does nothing at all.
+% It is not necessary to setup every footnote like
+% command as its own type!
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_new:nn #1 #2 % #1 name, #2 options
+ {
+ \prop_new:c { g_@@_currentmarks_ #1 _prop }
+ }
-\cs_set:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpoint #1 {
- \noindent
- \cs_if_exist:NT \tag_struct_begin:n { \tag_mc_end_push: }
- \tag@FELbl { #1 }
-}
+\fnote_new:nn {default}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_mark_gput:nn}
+% This commands takes as argument the representation of the mark
+% (e.g. \cs{@thefnmark} and the type (typically default should work)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_mark_gput:nn #1 #2 % #1 the representation of the mark, #2 type
+ {
+ \prop_gput:cxn { g_@@_currentmarks_ #2 _prop }
+ { \tag_get:n{struct_num} }
+ { #1 }
+ }
-\cs_set:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpointii #1 {
- \tag@FENote { #1 }
- \cs_if_exist:NT \tag_struct_begin:n { \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{} }
-}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \fnote_mark_gput:nn {no,oo}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnote_mark_gpop:nnN}
+% This commands takes as argument the representation of the mark
+% (e.g. the content of\cs{@thefnmark}), the series (typically default should work)
+% and a sequence into which every structure number in the property
+% is stored that has the same value as the mark
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_mark_gpop:nnN #1 #2 #3
+ {
+ \seq_clear:N #3
+ \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_tmpa_prop { g_@@_currentmarks_ #2 _prop }
+ \prop_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_tmpa_prop
+ {
+ \tl_if_eq:nnT {#1} { ##2 }
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% store the key (the structure number) in the seq
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \seq_put_right:Nn #3 { ##1 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% remove entry as used from the global prop
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \prop_gremove:cn { g_@@_currentmarks_ #2 _prop } {##1}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn\fnote_mark_gpop:nnN {ooN}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \subsubsection{Enabling tagging and links for the mark command}
+% To handle the mark in the text, we define a special command
+% which will surround \cs{@makefntext}.
+% At this time \cs{@thefnmark} is already set.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FEMark #1 %#1 content
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% end an open mc and start the structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnotemark }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The associated note is either auto detected
+% or given by the user.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_autodetect_bool
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the auto detecting we store the structure number
+% and \cs{@thefnmark} inside a prop and set
+% the target name of the link to the current structure number.
+% TODO: this should be usable for other footnote types
+% which means the name of the prop shouldn't be fix.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fnote_mark_gput:oo {\@thefnmark}{\l_fnote_type_tl}
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_linktarget_tl {footnote*.\tag_get:n{struct_num}}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If there is no autodetecting we need some id,
+% currently it is called \cs{l__fnote_currentlabel_tl}.
+% the Ref is set by looking at the label value.
+% We must also add the current structure number to the \ref of the FEnote.
+% Both must be delayed as we don't know if the objects of the FEnote and the mark
+% have already been created.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \hook_gput_code:nne {tagpdf/finish/before} {tagpdf/footnote}
+ {
+ \exp_not:N\fnote_gput_refs:ee
+ { \tag_get:n{struct_num} }
+ { \ref_value:Vn\l_@@_currentlabel_tl {fnote/struct} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% in this case we set the name of the linktarget in the note
+% to the structure number of the text mark.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_linktarget_tl {footnote*.\ref_value:Vn\l_@@_currentlabel_tl {fnote/struct}}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And now the actual content
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Lbl}
+ %
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_fnote_link_bool
+ {
+ \exp_args:No
+ \hyper@linkstart
+ { \l_fnote_link_type_tl }
+ { \l_@@_linktarget_tl }
+ #1
+ \hyper@linkend
+ }
+ { #1 }
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At last set the kernel command to this one
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_eq:NN \@kernel@process@makefnmark \tag@FEMark
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsubsection{The footnote text}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FELbl #1 {
- \tag_if_loaded:TF
- {
- % target should perhaps be raised ...
- \IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{ \hypertarget{fn.\the\c@absfootnote}{} }{}
- %\tag_struct_begin:n { tag=FENote,label=fn.\the\c@absfootnote } %alternativ location for structure
- \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=Lbl }
- \tag_mc_begin:n { tag=Lbl }
- #1
- \tag_mc_end:
- \tag_struct_end:
- }
- { #1 }
-}
+% We need a public command to append values to the Ref keys
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_gput_ref:nn,\fnote_gput_refs:nn,\fnote_gput_refs:ee}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_gput_ref:nn #1 #2 %#1 the structure number receiving the ref #2
+ {
+ \tag_if_active:T
+ {
+ \tag_struct_gput:nne {#1}{ref}{\tag_struct_object_ref:e { #2 }}
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \fnote_gput_refs:nn #1 #2 % pair of numbers
+ {
+ \@@_gput_ref:nn {#1}{#2}
+ \@@_gput_ref:nn {#2}{#1}
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \fnote_gput_refs:nn {ee}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_dflt_struct_tl
+\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_dflt_struct_tl {1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% kernel hook for tagging (2 args)
+% this sets the structure around the whole text
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENote #1#2 % #1 config point, \insert\footins #2 content
+ {
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% test if a footnote is allowed, if not move up to the document structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_check_child:nnTF {FENote}{pdf2}
+ {
+ \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnote }
+ }
+ {
+ \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnote,parent=\l_@@_dflt_struct_tl }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Store the current structure number for labels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_currentstruct_tl { \tag_get:n{struct_num} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We want to move the label structure here. So we provide a container
+% It number is |\l__fnote_currentstruct_tl| plus 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=footnotelabel }\tag_struct_end:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% after we have opened the structure we can use the structure number to
+% try to detect the connected marks. As with the marks we assume that sometimes
+% no auto detection is done.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_autodetect_bool
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% find open marks with identical \cs{@thefnmark}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fnote_mark_gpop:ooN { \@thefnmark }{ \l_fnote_type_tl } \l_@@_currentrefs_seq
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we store the object numbers of the marks in the /Ref of the FENote structure:
+% and the number of the FEnote into the marks structure:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \seq_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_currentrefs_seq
+ {
+ \fnote_gput_refs:ee {##1}{ \l_@@_currentstruct_tl }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If no auto detection is done
+% \begin{NOTE}{UF}
+% TODO: decide what to do here: some label in the optional argument?
+% or refer to \cs{footref}
+% \end{NOTE}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%no auto
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENote #1 {
- \tag_if_loaded:TF
- {
- \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=FENote}
- #1
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This finish the setup of the tagging structure.
+% Now we process the text. The destinations for the links are set with the label
+% so that we can be sure that we are in hmode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #1 {#2}
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At last set the kernel command to this one
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_eq:NN \@kernel@process@footnotetext \tag@FENote
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \cs{@makefntext@cfgpoint} is the configuration point responsible for
+% typesetting the mark in the note. We use it to surround
+% the mark with the needed tagging commands.
+%
+% TODO check if this should/can be kernel configuration points
+% or if an additional kernel configuration points are needed.
+% If yes, what about the paragraph start and the paratagging??
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpoint #1 %#1 code that typesets the mark.
+ {
+ \noindent
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \tag@FENoteLbl { #1 }
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{tag@FENoteLbl} creates the label in the note on the bottom.
+% It also adds link targets for the hyperlinking.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tag@FENoteLbl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENoteLbl #1
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We create a link target for every related mark. The name is footnote* + structure number
+% of the mark. We also add a link target for the current structure (for footref)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ %\seq_show:N\l_@@_currentrefs_seq
+ \seq_map_inline:Nn\l_@@_currentrefs_seq {\MakeLinkTarget*{footnote*.##1}}
+ \MakeLinkTarget*{footnote*.\l_@@_currentstruct_tl}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% now we add the tagging commands. We move the structure of the label to
+% to the container at the begin of the note.
+% \begin{NOTE}{UF}
+% check if the NonStruct is really needed. Perhaps we can simply move the mc.
+% \end{NOTE}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_struct_begin:n { tag=NonStruct,parent=\l_@@_currentstruct_tl +1 }
+ \tag_mc_begin:n { tag=Lbl }
+ #1
\tag_mc_end:
- %\tag_struct_end: %alternative location for structure end but ends inside a P
- }
- { #1 }
-}
-
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \cs{@makefntext@cfgpointii} is the
+% configuration point around the actual note text.
+%
+% TODO check if this should/can be kernel configuration points
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@makefntext@cfgpointii #1
+ {
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \tag@FENotetext { #1 }
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\tag@FENotetext}
+%
+% This command currently only adds an MC chunk,
+%
+% TODO Should it set a mc or could it rely on the content?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag@FENotetext #1
+ {
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{}
+ #1
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%-------------------------------------
-
+% \begin{macrocode}
\ExplSyntaxOff
%</kernel>
% \end{macrocode}
-%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=>
+% \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Reimplementing the \pkg{footmisc} package}
%
@@ -1571,7 +2296,10 @@
\ifFN@multiplefootnote
\providecommand*{\multiplefootnotemarker}{3sp}
- \providecommand*{\multfootsep}{,}
+% we tag the separator as artifact
+ \ExplSyntaxOn
+ \providecommand*{\multfootsep}{\tag_mc_end_push:\tag_mc_begin:n{artifact},\tag_mc_end:\tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}
+ \ExplSyntaxOff
\AddToHook{fnmark} {\FN@mf@check}
\AddToHook{fnmark/end} {\FN@mf@prepare}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14d8e943624
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2022,2023 The LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-mathpkg} code\thanks{}}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand\fmi[1]{\begin{quote} TODO: \itshape #1\end{quote}}
+% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}}
+% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}}
+% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file implements adaptions to various math packages needed for
+% the tagging project.
+%
+% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=math>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{File declaration}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-mathpkg.ltx}
+ [2023-01-05 v0.1a mathpkg adaptions]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Tagpdf support}
+% To make the code independent from tagging being loaded and active
+% we load the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{tagpdf-base}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{package/breqn/after}{
+ \RegisterMathEnvironment{dmath}
+ \RegisterMathEnvironment{dgroup*}
+ \AddToHook{env/dmath/begin}{\tagpdfparaOff}
+ \AddToHook{env/dgroup*/begin}{\tagpdfparaOff}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Force loading of \pkg{amsmath} before \pkg{cases}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook {package/cases/before}{\RequirePackage{amsmath}}
+\AddToHook{package/cases/after}{
+ \RegisterMathEnvironment{subnumcases}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Wrapper files for testphase key}
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..61818bde15e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1277 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2022-2023 The LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%
+\def\ltmathtaggingdate{2023-03-08}
+\def\ltmathtaggingversion{v0.5a}
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+
+\usepackage{todonotes}
+
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-mathtagging} code\thanks{}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach, Joseph Wright, \LaTeX{} Project}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}}
+% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}}
+% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% ^^A \car {...} for marginal comments
+% ^^A \car*{...} for longer inline comments
+%
+% \NewDocumentCommand\car{sO{}m}
+% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,color=blue!10,#2]{#3}}^^A
+% {\todo[color=blue!10,#2]{#3}}}
+%
+% \NewDocumentCommand\fmi{sO{}m}
+% {\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\todo[inline,#2]{#3}}^^A
+% {\todo[#2]{#3}}}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% This is an experimental prototype. It captures math material
+% (basically okay, but the interfaces for packages aren't yet
+% there) and tags the material (which is not yet anywhere near the
+% final state). That part is provided for experimentation and to
+% gather feedback, etc.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% \car*{Todo: update all the documentation! Both here and
+% (what little there is!) in the implementation section.}
+%
+% This file implements capture of all math mode material at the outer
+% level, i.e., a formula is captured in its entirety with inner text
+% blocks (possibly containing further math) absorbed as part of the
+% formula. For example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \[ a \in A \text{ for all $a<5$} \]
+%\end{verbatim}
+% would only result in a single capture of the tokens
+% ``\verb*/a \in A \text{ for all $a<5$}/''.
+%
+% \subsection{Code level interfaces}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\math_register_env:n, \math_register_env:nn}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{math_register_env:n} \Arg{env}
+% \cs{math_register_env:nn} \Arg{env} \Arg{options}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Registers the \meta{env} as a math environment which should be captured
+% and made available. This is necessary for all top-level math mode
+% environments: low-level errors may result if these are not correct
+% set up. One or more key--value \meta{options} may also be given:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{arg-spec}] The argument specification taken by the
+% beginning of the environment; this is used to remove non-mathematical
+% material.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\math_processor:n}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{math_processor:n} \Arg{tokens}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Declares that the captured math content should be passed to the
+% \meta{tokens}, which will receive the environment type as |#1| and
+% the content as |#2|.
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \subsection{Document level interfaces}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\RegisterMathEnvironment}
+% \begin{syntax}
+% \cs{RegisterMathEnvironment} \oarg{options} \Arg{env}
+% \end{syntax}
+% Registers the \meta{env} as a math environment which should be captured
+% and made available. This is necessary for all top-level math mode
+% environments: low-level errors may result if these are not correct
+% set up. One or more key--value \meta{options} may also be given:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{arg-spec}] The argument specification taken by the
+% beginning of the environment; this is used to remove non-mathematical
+% material.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \section{Known current bugs, etc.}
+% \car*{New Section, now with subsections.\\
+% As indicated, these lists are probably incomplete.\\
+% Some of these have been addressed in a more recent branch.}
+%
+% \subsection{Capture/grabbing problems}
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Incorrect grabbing of |$|-math when there is also
+% explicit |$|-math within a \textit{text environment}
+% that is itself within the math that should all be grabbed.
+% \item Similar incorrect grabbing with |$$| also.
+% \item The grabbing, for all the display environments (and |\) \]|), needs
+% to deal with nesting: \pkg{amsmath} contains code for this.
+% \item
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \subsection{Other problems}
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% The presence of \cs{m@th} in association with \cs{ensuremath}
+% does not necessarily indicate fakemath. This is because
+% wanting mathsurround to be zero is very reasonable and common,
+% \emph{even when the math is genuine} (and hence needs to be collected).
+% \item User-defined environments can create problems; but this area, of
+% new, copied and changed environments, has not yet been developed.
+%
+% \car*{Joseph wrote, inter alia:\\
+% My thinking [regarding] \cs{RegisterMathEnvironment}\\
+% - (New) Math environments should not be created-then-patched, but only
+% generated by a [(future)] dedicated command (\cs{DeclareMathEnviornment},
+% presumably)\\
+% - Math environments created with \pkg{ltcmd} [commands] should not be copied, . . .\\
+% - Package authors should be able to manually set up math environments with a public boolean.}
+%
+% \item
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Other ToDos}
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Add (some of) the math display commands that were \enquote{lifted from
+% plain}, e.g., \cs{displaylines} \cs{eqalign}(??).
+% \item
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+% \car*{\cs{MaybeStop} (temporarily) not executed, as it is unknown on Chris' system.}
+% \iffalse
+% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+% \else
+% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=math>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{File declaration}
+%
+% \car{Change description here?}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-mathtagging.ltx}
+ [\ltmathtaggingdate\space
+ \ltmathtaggingversion\space
+ Grab all the math(s) and tag it (experiments)]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Temp loading \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Setup}
+%
+% Loading \pkg{amsmath} is an absolute requirement: this avoids needing to
+% have conditional definitions and deals with how to define \cs{[}/\cs{]}
+% neatly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument
+ { \RequirePackage { amsmath } }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Data structures}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_collected_bool}
+% Tracks whether math mode material has been collected, which happens inside
+% \pkg{amsmath} environments as well as those handled directly here.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \car{Change first tl name below: `env' $=>$ `info'?\\
+% Or do we need an extra storage tl?}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_grabbed_env_tl, \g_@@_grabbed_math_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \g_@@_grabbed_env_tl
+\tl_new:N \g_@@_grabbed_math_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \subsection{Interface commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {\@@_process:nn, \@@_process:Vn, \@@_process_auxi:nn, \@@_process_auxii:nn}
+% A no-op place-holder; the internal wrapper means that it does not need to
+% be concerned with internals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_process:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \legacy_if:nF { measuring@ }
+ {
+ \tl_if_in:nnF {#2} { \m@th }
+ { \tl_trim_spaces_apply:nN {#2} \@@_process_auxi:nn {#1} }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_process:nn { V }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_process_auxi:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_grabbed_env_tl {#2}
+ \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_grabbed_math_tl {#1}
+ \@@_process_auxii:nn {#2} {#1}
+ }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_process_auxii:nn #1#2 { }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math_processor:n}
+% A simple installer
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_processor:n #1
+ { \cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_process_auxii:nn ##1##2 {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Content grabbing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_dollar:w}
+% Grab up to a single |$|, for inline math mode, suppressing
+% any processing if the first token is \tn{m@th}.
+%
+% \fmi{what's that test doing?}
+%
+% \car{It is some kind of fix, to avoid the remote
+% possibility that the math is empty, making the code
+% produce an unwanted \texttt{\$\$}.}
+%
+%\car{cf.~the code for this in \cs{@ensuredmath}}
+%
+%\car{It is harmless but unnecessary in the dollardollar grabbing below.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_dollar:w % $
+ #1 $
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \fmi{what's that test doing?}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_if_blank:nF {#1}
+ {
+ \@@_process:nn { math } {#1} % $
+% fairly simple this one
+ \tagmcend %end P-chunk, in code: \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \@kernel@math@begin
+ #1 $
+ \@kernel@math@end
+ \tagmcbegin{} % restart P-chunk (whatsits in pdftex)
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_dollardollar:w}
+% And for the classical \TeX{} display structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+\skip_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_skip
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_dollardollar:w % $$
+ #1 $$
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:nF {#1}
+ {
+ \@@_tag_dollardollar_display:nn { equation* }{#1}
+ #1
+ $$
+ }
+ }
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@close@P {
+ \tagmcend %end P-chunk, in code: \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \int_gincr:N \g__tag_para_end_int
+ \bool_if:NT \l__tag_para_show_bool
+ { \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact}
+ \rlap{\color_select:n{red}\tiny\ \int_use:N\g__tag_para_end_int}
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ }
+ \tag_struct_end:
+}
+
+
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_tag_dollardollar_display:nn #1#2 {
+ \@@_process:nn {#1} {#2}
+ \@kernel@close@P
+ \@kernel@math@begin
+% \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayskip {-\belowdisplayskip}
+% \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayshortskip {-\belowdisplayshortskip}
+% \int_set:Nn \postdisplaypenalty {10000}
+%%
+% \group_insert_after:N \@@_tag_dollardollar_display_end:
+}
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_tag_dollardollar_display_end: {
+% \typeout{== tag dollarldollar display end}
+% \ShowTagging{struct-stack}
+ \tagpdfparaOff
+ \para_raw_end:
+ \tagpdfparaOn
+ \l_@@_tmpa_skip \lastskip
+ \@kernel@math@end
+ \penalty \postdisplaypenalty
+ \skip_vertical:n { -\l_@@_tmpa_skip }
+%
+ \@doendpe % this has no \end{...} to take care of it
+}
+
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_inline:w}
+% Collect inline math content and deal with the need to move to math mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_inline:w % \(
+ #1 \)
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:nF {#1}
+ {
+ \@@_process:nn { math } {#1}
+ $ #1 $
+ }
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_eqn:w}
+% For the most common use of \cs{[}/\cs{]}: turn into an environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_eqn:w % \[
+ #1 \]
+ {
+% \typeout{collected? = \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool {true}{false}}
+ \begin { equation* } #1 \end { equation* }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Marking math environments}
+%
+% A general mechanism for math mode environments that do not grab their
+% content (\emph{cf.}~most \pkg{amsmath} environments).
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_env_name_tl}
+% To allow us to carry out \enquote{special effects}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_env_name_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% Here we set up specialised handling of environments. The idea for the
+% \texttt{arg-spec} key is that if an environment takes arguments, we
+% don't worry during the main grabbing. Rather, we remove the arguments
+% from the grabbed content and forward only the payload. That is done by
+% (ab)using \pkg{ltcmd}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\keys_define:nn { @@ }
+ {
+ arg-spec .code:n =
+ {
+ \ExpandArgs { c } \DeclareDocumentCommand
+ { @@_env \l_@@_env_name_tl _aux: }
+ {#1}
+ { \@@_env_forward:w }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math_register_env:nn}
+% \begin{macro}{\math_register_env:n}
+% \begin{macro}{\RegisterMathEnvironment}
+% Set up to capture environment content and make available.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_env:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_env_name_tl {#1}
+ \keys_set:nn { @@ } {#2}
+ \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } {#1}
+ \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _end: } { end #1 }
+%
+ \ExpandArgs { nnx } \RenewDocumentEnvironment {#1} { b }
+ {
+% \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+% \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+% {
+% \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+% ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1}
+% }
+% { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} }
+ \exp_not:N \bool_if:NTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ {
+% \typeout{===>B1}
+ }
+ {
+% \typeout{===>B2}
+ \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+ ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1}
+ }
+ { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} }
+ \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@begin }
+ \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ }
+% \exp_not:N \tracingall
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _begin: }
+ ####1
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: }
+% \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: }
+% \exp_not:N \tracingnone
+% \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@end }
+ }
+ {
+ }
+ }
+
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \__cs_tmp:w #1
+ {
+ \group_begin:
+ \exp_args:No \__cs_generate_internal_variant:n
+ { \tl_to_str:n {#1} }
+ \group_end:
+ }
+\__cs_tmp:w { nnxx }
+
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_halign_env:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_env_name_tl {#1}
+ \keys_set:nn { @@ } {#2}
+ \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } {#1}
+ \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _end: } { end #1 }
+%
+ \ExpandArgs { nnxx } \RenewDocumentEnvironment {#1} { b }
+ {
+% \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+% \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+% {
+% \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+% ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1}
+% }
+% { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} }
+ \exp_not:N \bool_if:NTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ {
+% \typeout{===>B1}
+ }
+ {
+% \typeout{===>B2}
+ \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+ ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1}
+ }
+ { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} }
+ \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@begin }
+ \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ }
+% \exp_not:N \tracingall
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _begin: }
+ ####1
+% \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: }
+% \exp_not:N \tracingnone
+ }
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: }
+ }
+ }
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_odd_env:nn #1#2
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_env_name_tl {#1}
+ \keys_set:nn { @@ } {#2}
+ \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _begin: } {#1}
+ \cs_gset_eq:cc { @@_env_ #1 _end: } { end #1 }
+%
+ \ExpandArgs { nnxx } \RenewDocumentEnvironment {#1} { b }
+ {
+ \exp_not:N \bool_if:NTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ {
+% \typeout{===>B1}
+ }
+ {
+% \typeout{===>B2}
+ \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env #1 _aux: }
+ ####1 \exp_not:N \@@_env_end: {#1}
+ }
+ { \exp_not:N \@@_process:nn {#1} {####1} }
+ \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@begin }
+ \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ }
+% \exp_not:N \tracingall
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _begin: }
+ ####1
+ }
+ {
+ \exp_not:c { @@_env_ #1 _end: }
+% needed if we don't have $$...$$
+% \exp_not:n { \typeout{---> @kernel@math@registered@end }}
+ \exp_not:n { \@kernel@math@registered@end }
+ }
+ }
+
+
+% FMi: compare with block change!
+%
+% \DeclareRobustCommand*\begin[1]{%
+% \UseHook{env/#1/before}%
+% \@ifundefined{#1}%
+% {\def\reserved@a{\@latex@error{Environment #1 undefined}\@eha}}%
+% {\def\reserved@a{\def\@currenvir{#1}%
+% \edef\@currenvline{\on@line}%
+% \@execute@begin@hook{#1}%
+% \csname #1\endcsname}}%
+% \@ignorefalse
+% \begingroup
+% \@endpefalse % tmp!!! is it ok to drop this here?
+% \reserved@a}
+
+
+\cs_new:Npn \@kernel@math@registered@begin {
+% \ShowTagging{struct-stack}
+%\typeout{==>A1}\ShowTagging{struct-stack,mc-current}
+ \mode_if_vertical:TF
+ {
+% \legacy_if:nTF { @endpe }
+% { \legacy_if_set_false:n { @endpe } }
+% { \__block_list_beginpar_vmode: }
+%
+% \typeout{==>~ at:~ \g__tag_struct_tag_tl}
+%
+ \exp_args:Noo\str_if_eq:nnF \g__tag_struct_tag_tl { \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl } % needs correction!
+ {
+% \typeout{==>A2}
+ \__block_beginpar_vmode:
+ } % needs correction!
+ }
+ {
+% \typeout{==>A3}
+ \@kernel@close@P
+% \tagmcend % needs correction!
+ }
+ \@kernel@math@begin
+ \tagpdfparaOff
+% \typeout{==>MC1}\ShowTagging{mc-current}
+}
+
+\cs_new:Npn \@kernel@math@registered@end {
+% \typeout{==>MC2}\ShowTagging{mc-current}
+ \para_raw_end:
+ \tagpdfparaOn
+ \@kernel@math@end
+% \typeout{==>MC3}\ShowTagging{mc-current}
+ \@endpetrue
+}
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \math_register_env:n #1
+ { \math_register_env:nn {#1} { } }
+\NewDocumentCommand \RegisterMathEnvironment { O{} m }
+ { \math_register_env:nn {#2} {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_env_forward:w}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_env_forward:w #1 \@@_env_end: #2
+ { \@@_process:nn {#2} {#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Document commands}
+%
+% \car*{Add one more here: \texttt{displaymath}, which
+% is equivalent to \cs{[} , \cs{]}\\
+% and hence to the basic \texttt{equation*}.\\
+% Added in more recent branch.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}
+% {\equation, \@@_equation_begin:, \equation*, \@@_equation_star_begin:}
+% \begin{macro}
+% {\endequation, \@@_equation_end:, \endequation*, \@@_equation_star_end:}
+% These environments are not set up by \pkg{amsmath} to collect their body,
+% so we do that here. This has to be done \emph{after} we can be sure
+% \pkg{amsmath} is loaded.
+%
+% \car*{Note that with \pkg{amsmath} loaded, \texttt{equation*} and \texttt{equation}\\
+% are the two basics: they are used to define the other single-row\\
+% display environments, etc.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument
+ {
+ \math_register_env:n { equation }
+ \math_register_env:n { equation* }
+% at the moment register_env can only do display math
+% \math_register_env:n { math }
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{math} {b}{$#1$}{}
+% and this one doesn't work either
+% \math_register_env:n { displaymath }
+ \RenewDocumentEnvironment{displaymath} {b}{\[#1\]}{}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\(, \)}
+% If math mode has not been collected, we need to do that; otherwise, worry
+% about whether we are in math mode or not. The closing command here can only
+% occur inside a collected math block: otherwise it will be simply used as
+% a delimiter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \( % \)
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool
+ {
+ \mode_if_math:TF
+ { \@badmath }
+ { $ }
+ }
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ \@@_grab_inline:w
+ }
+ } % \(
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \)
+ {
+ \mode_if_math:TF
+ { $ }
+ { \@badmath }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\[, \]}
+% Again, we need to watch for when \pkg{amsmath} is loaded after this code.
+% The flag usage here is to cover the case where \cs{[}/\cs{]} is hidden
+% inside another environment. In this case the grabbing happens on
+% the outer level and should not be repeated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument
+ {
+ \cs_gset_protected:Npn \[ % \]
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool
+ { \begin { equation* } }
+ { \@@_grab_eqn:w }
+ } % \[
+ \cs_gset_protected:Npn \]
+ {
+ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool
+ { \end{ equation* } }
+ { \@badmath }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ensuremath}
+% A bit of nesting fun to make sure we collect only if required.
+% \fmi{why does ensuremath need handling at all?}
+%
+% \car{Indeed! Currently, this is setup to process the math that
+% it has anyways already captured as its argument; thus it is more
+% efficient than leaving the capture to be repeated by the \cs{everymath}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\cs_gset_protected:Npn \ensuremath #1
+% {
+% \mode_if_math:TF
+% {#1}
+% {
+% \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_collected_bool
+% { \@ensuredmath {#1} }
+% {
+% \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+% \@@_process:nn { math } {#1}
+% \@ensuredmath {#1}
+% \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+% }
+% }
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{\cs{everymath} and \cs{everydisplay}}
+%
+% The business end for grabbing inline math and \enquote{raw} \TeX{}
+% display. Most display math mode is actually handled elsewhere, as we
+% have macro control.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+\tl_new:N\tmpmathcontent
+
+
+\def\@kernel@math@begin {
+% \typeout{==>~math~begin}
+% needs different handling if we support nesting
+ \tl_gset:Nx\tmpmathcontent
+ {\exp_not:N\begin{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl}
+ \space
+ \exp_not:V\g__math_grabbed_math_tl
+ \space
+ \exp_not:N\end{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl}
+ }
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula,
+ AFinline-o=\tmpmathcontent,
+ title-o=\g__math_grabbed_env_tl,
+ actualtext=\tmpmathcontent
+% alt=\tmpmathcontent
+ }
+% inner formula if multiple parts (not really implemented yet)
+ \grabaformulapartandstart
+% the above does:
+% \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula}\tagmcbegin{}
+% or just
+% \tagmcbegin{}
+}
+\def\@kernel@math@end {
+% \typeout{==>~math~end}
+% \ShowTagging{struct-stack}
+ \tagmcend
+ \if@subformulas
+ \tagstructend
+ \else
+ \fi
+ \tagstructend
+% \ShowTagging{struct-stack}
+}
+
+\exp_args:No \tex_everymath:D
+ {
+ \tex_the:D \tex_everymath:D
+ \bool_if:NF \l_@@_collected_bool
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ \@@_grab_dollar:w
+ }
+ }
+\exp_args:No \tex_everydisplay:D
+ {
+ \tex_the:D \tex_everydisplay:D
+ \iftrue % this may have to be a settable flag!
+% {
+% \typeout{==>~ in~ everydisplay}
+ \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayskip {-\belowdisplayskip}
+ \skip_set:Nn \belowdisplayshortskip {-\belowdisplayshortskip}
+ \int_set:Nn \postdisplaypenalty {10000}
+%
+ \group_insert_after:N \@@_tag_dollardollar_display_end:
+% }
+ \fi
+ \bool_if:NF \l_@@_collected_bool
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ \@@_grab_dollardollar:w
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Modifying kernel environments}
+%
+% We need to cover this even though it is, of course, not encouraged.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\math_register_env:n { eqnarray }
+\math_register_env:n { eqnarray* }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Places where math mode is (ab)used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\clist_map_inline:nn
+ { tabular }
+ {
+ \AddToHook{ env / #1 / begin }
+ { \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_m@th:, \m@th}
+% Handle non-math use of math mode. At present nesting isn't supported as
+% \cs{m@th} pops up in a few places that \emph{are} math mode!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_m@th: \m@th
+\cs_gset_protected:Npn \m@th
+ {
+ \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_collected_bool
+ \@@_m@th:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Modifying \pkg{amsmath}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_amsmath_align@:nn}
+% \begin{macro}
+% {
+% \@@_amsmath_gather@:n ,
+% \@@_amsmath_multline@:n
+% }
+% \begin{macro}{\align@}
+% \begin{macro}{\gather@, \multline@}
+% Mark up all of the display environments as the content is captured anyway.
+% We then use an internal macro in each environment type to insert the
+% processing code. Each of these is slightly different, so we cannot use a
+% simple loop here. The test for \cs{split@tag} is required as the
+% \texttt{split} environment internally uses \texttt{gather} \emph{when not
+% within an \pkg{amsmath}} environment, for example inside \texttt{equation}.
+% Without the precaution, we'd get two copies of the grabbed math, the second
+% of which would start with \cs{split@tag}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+
+
+\tl_gput_right:Nn \@kernel@before@begindocument {
+%
+\renewenvironment{gather*}{%
+ \start@gather\st@rredtrue
+}
+{%
+% this redirection doesn't work if we alter "gather"!
+ % \endgather
+% so replace it with its real meaning
+ \math@cr \black@\totwidth@ \egroup
+ $$\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\common@align@ending {
+ \math@cr \black@\totwidth@
+ \egroup
+ \ifingather@
+ \restorealignstate@
+ \egroup
+ \nonumber
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi\iffalse}\fi
+ \else
+ $$%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+\renewenvironment{alignat}{%
+ \start@align\z@\st@rredfalse
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{alignat*}{%
+ \start@align\z@\st@rredtrue
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{xalignat}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredfalse
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{xalignat*}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredtrue
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{xxalignat}{%
+ \start@align\tw@\st@rredtrue
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{align}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredfalse\m@ne
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{align*}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredtrue\m@ne
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{flalign}{%
+ \start@align\tw@\st@rredfalse\m@ne
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+\renewenvironment{flalign*}{%
+ \start@align\tw@\st@rredtrue\m@ne
+}{%
+ \common@align@ending
+}
+%
+\renewenvironment{multline*}{\start@multline\st@rredtrue}
+{%
+ \iftagsleft@ \@xp\lendmultline@ \else \@xp\rendmultline@ \fi
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Also for "false?"
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\measuring@true{\let\ifmeasuring@\iftrue\tag_stop:}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {align}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {align*}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {flalign}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {flalign*}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {gather}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {gather*}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {multline}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {multline*}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {xalignat}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {xalignat*}{}
+ \math_register_halign_env:nn {xxalignat}{}
+ %
+ \@namedef{maketag @ @ @} #1{%
+% \typeout{--->maketag @ @ @}
+ \ifmeasuring@
+ \hbox{\m@th\normalfont#1}%
+ \else
+ \tagmcend \tagstructbegin{tag=Lbl}%
+ \tagmcbegin{tag=Lbl}%
+ \hbox{\m@th\normalfont#1}%
+ \tagmcend \tagstructend \tagmcbegin{}%
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\intertext@{%
+ \def\intertext##1{%
+ \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi
+ \noalign{%
+% we have to flip the sign on the skip because we flipped it on the outside
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip-\belowdisplayskip
+ \vbox{
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Stop tagging when measuring:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi
+ \normalbaselines
+ \ifdim\linewidth=\columnwidth
+ \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End the previous mc:\fmi{if we use 2 levels of formulas this would
+% need changing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are already in a par so we change now to Span:\fmi{not true any longer}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tagpdfsetup{paratag=P}%
+ \tagpdfparaOn
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restart the MC
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}%
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip%
+ }%
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{math@cr @ @ @ gather}{%
+ \ifst@rred\nonumber\fi
+ &\relax
+ \make@display@tag
+%
+ \maybestartnewformulatag
+%
+ \ifst@rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{math@cr @ @ @ align}{%
+ \ifst@rred\nonumber\fi
+ \if@eqnsw \global\tag@true \fi
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \add@amps\maxfields@
+ \omit
+ \kern-\alignsep@
+ \iftag@
+ \setboxz@h{\@lign\strut@{\make@display@tag}}%
+ \place@tag
+ \fi
+%
+ \maybestartnewformulatag
+%
+ \ifst@rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+ \global\lineht@\z@
+ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\restore@math@cr{\@namedef{math@cr @ @ @}{
+%
+ \maybestartnewformulatag
+%
+ \cr}}
+\restore@math@cr
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+
+% \begin{macro}{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_at_nl_first:w #1 \\ #2 \\ #3 \s_stop
+ {
+ \quark_if_nil:nTF {#2}
+ { {#1} { } }
+ {
+ \@@_split_chk_if_begin:ww #1 \begin \q_nil \s_mark
+ #2 \\ #3 \s_stop
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_chk_if_begin:ww #1 \begin #2 #3 \s_mark
+ #4 \\ \q_nil \\ \s_stop
+ {
+ \quark_if_nil:nTF {#2}
+ { {#1} {#4} }
+ {
+ \exp_after:wN \@@_split_collect_one_end:w
+ \@@_split_cleanup_begin_q_nil:w #1 \begin{#2} #3 \\ #4 \s_stop
+ { } { 1 }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_cleanup_begin_q_nil:w #1 \begin \q_nil {#1}
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_collect_one_end:w #1 \end #2 #3 \s_stop #4 #5
+ {
+ \exp_args:Nf \@@_split_check_count_begins:nnnn
+ { \@@_split_count_begins:n { #4 #1 } } {#5}
+ { #4 #1 \end{#2} } {#3}
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_count_begins:n #1
+ { \int_eval:n { 0 \@@_split_count_begins:w #1 \begin \q_nil } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_count_begins:w #1 \begin #2
+ { \quark_if_nil:nF {#2} { +1 \@@_split_count_begins:w } }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_check_count_begins:nnnn #1 #2 #3 #4
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnTF {#1} = {#2}
+ {
+ \exp_last_unbraced:Nf \@@_split_final_cleanup:nn
+ { \split:n { \@@_split_guard:n {#3} #4 } }
+ }
+ {
+ \exp_args:No \use_ii_i:nn
+ { \exp_after:wN { \int_value:w \int_eval:n { #2 + 1 } } }
+ { \@@_split_collect_one_end:w #4 \s_stop {#3} }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_final_cleanup:nn #1 #2
+ {
+ \exp:w \@@_split_final_cleanup:w #1
+ \@@_split_guard:n \q_nil \s_mark { }
+ {#2}
+ }
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_final_cleanup:w #1 \@@_split_guard:n #2 #3 \s_mark #4
+ {
+ \quark_if_nil:nTF {#2}
+ { \exp_end: { #4 #1 } }
+ { \@@_split_final_cleanup:w #3 \s_mark { #4 #1 #2 } }
+ }
+\NewDocumentCommand \splitnl { mm +m }
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nf \l_tmpa_tl { \split:n {#3} }
+ \show \l_tmpa_tl
+ \exp_after:wN \__splitnl_aux:nnNN \l_tmpa_tl #1 #2
+ }
+
+
+\cs_new:Npn \split:n #1 {
+ \@@_split_at_nl_first:w #1 \\ \q_nil \\ \s_stop }
+
+\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_at_nl:NN #1#2 {
+ \tl_set:Nf \l_tmpa_tl {
+ \exp_after:wN \@@_split_at_nl_first:w #1 \\ \q_nil \\ \s_stop }
+ \exp_after:wN \@@_split_at_nl_aux:nnNN \l_tmpa_tl #1 #2
+}
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_at_nl_aux:nnNN #1 #2 #3 #4
+ {
+ \tl_gset:Nn #4 {#1}
+ \tl_gset:Nn #3 {#2}
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maybestartnewformulatag}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+\newif\if@subformulas
+\tl_new:N \result
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn\grabaformulapartandstart {
+ \@@_split_at_nl:NN \g__math_grabbed_math_tl \result
+ \typeout{====>first-result=\meaning\result}
+ \typeout{====>first-tmpmathcontent=\meaning\g__math_grabbed_math_tl}
+ \tl_if_empty:NTF \g__math_grabbed_math_tl
+ {
+ \typeout{====>formula~ has~ no~ subparts}
+ \global\@subformulasfalse
+ }
+ {
+ \typeout{====>formula~ has~ subparts}
+ \global\@subformulastrue
+ \edef\resulttitle{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl\space (part)}
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula,
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For now we don't put anything in /alt or /ActualText on subformulas
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% alt=\result,
+ title-o=\resulttitle
+ }
+ }
+ \tagmcbegin{}
+}
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn\grabaformulapartandmayberestart {
+ \@@_split_at_nl:NN \g__math_grabbed_math_tl \result
+ \typeout{====>result=\meaning\result}
+ \typeout{====>tmpmathcontent=\meaning\g__math_grabbed_math_tl}
+% \tl_if_empty:NTF \g__math_grabbed_math_tl
+% {
+% \typeout{====>tmpmathcontent=empty}
+% }
+% {
+% \typeout{====>tmpmathcontent=not-empty}
+ \edef\resulttitle{\g__math_grabbed_env_tl\space (part)}
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=Formula,
+ alt=\result,
+ title-o=\resulttitle
+ }
+% }
+ \tagmcbegin{}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maybestartnewformulatag {
+\if@subformulas
+ \ifmeasuring@\else
+%
+ \tl_if_empty:NF \g__math_grabbed_math_tl
+ {
+ \tagmcend
+ \tagstructend
+ \grabaformulapartandmayberestart
+ }
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The breqn packages changes catcodes and that isn't yet covered
+% by our mechanism.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\AddToHook{package/breqn/after}{
+% \typeout{===>~ in~ hook}
+% \math_register_halign_env:nn {dmath}{}
+% \math_register_halign_env:nn {dgroup*}{}
+%}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtools.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtools.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c3f43243b10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-mathtools.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: latex-lab-mathtools.dtx
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2022,2023 The LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-amsmath.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-mathtools} code\thanks{}}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand\fmi[1]{\begin{quote} TODO: \itshape #1\end{quote}}
+% \newcommand\NEW[1]{\marginpar{\mbox{}\hfill\fbox{New: #1}}}
+% \providecommand\class[1]{\texttt{#1.cls}}
+% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file implements adaptions to the \pkg{mathtools} package needed for
+% the tagging project.
+%
+% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<@@=math>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{File declaration}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-mathtools.ltx}
+ [2023-01-05 v0.1a mathtools adaptions]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Tagpdf support}
+% To make the code independent from tagging being loaded and active
+% we load the \pkg{tagpdf-base} package:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{tagpdf-base}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\cs{shortintertext}}
+% Similar to the \cs{intertext} command from amsmath,
+% \cs{shortintertext} errors with active tagging as it is processed twice
+% which leads to duplicated structures.
+% The fix is similar but is complicated as \pkg{mathtools} defines two version (and
+% an additional \cs{intertext} version) and package options to switch between the variants.
+%
+% At first we redefine all the internal commands
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+\tl_new:N\l_@@_mathtools_init_tl
+\AddToHook{package/mathtools/after}
+ {%
+ \cs_if_eq:NNTF\intertext@ \MT_intertext:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl {\MT_orig_intertext_false:}
+ }
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl {\MT_orig_intertext_true:}
+ }
+ \cs_if_eq:NNTF\shortintertext@ \MT_shortintertext:n
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl
+ {\MT_orig_shortintertext_false:}
+ }
+ {
+ \tl_put_right:Nn \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl
+ {\MT_orig_shortintertext_true:}
+ }
+ \def\MT_intertext: {%
+ \def\intertext##1{%
+ \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi
+ \noalign{%
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \vskip-\lineskiplimit % CCS
+ \vskip\normallineskiplimit % CCS
+ \vskip\l_MT_above_intertext_sep
+ \vbox{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Stop tagging when measuring:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi
+ \normalbaselines
+ \ifdim
+ \ifdim\@totalleftmargin=\z@
+ \linewidth
+ \else
+ -\maxdimen
+ \fi
+ =\columnwidth
+ \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End the previous mc:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are already in a par so we change now to Span:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span}
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restart the MC
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}%
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip%
+ \vskip-\lineskiplimit % CCS
+ \vskip\normallineskiplimit % CCS
+ \vskip\l_MT_below_intertext_sep
+ }%
+ }%
+ \MH_let:NwN \shortintertext \shortintertext@
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\MT_orig_shortintertext:n #1{%
+ \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi
+ \noalign{%
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip
+ \vbox{%
+ \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi
+ \normalbaselines
+ \MH_if_dim:w
+ \MH_if_dim:w \@totalleftmargin=\z@
+ \linewidth
+ \MH_else:
+ -\maxdimen
+ \MH_fi:
+ =\columnwidth
+ \MH_else:
+ \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \MH_fi:
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span}
+ \noindent\ignorespaces#1\par
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip%
+ }%
+ }
+
+ \def\MT_shortintertext:n #1{%
+ \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi
+ \noalign{%
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip
+ \vskip-\lineskiplimit
+ \vskip\normallineskiplimit
+ \vskip\l_MT_above_shortintertext_sep
+ \vbox{%
+ \ifmeasuring@\tag_stop:\fi
+ \normalbaselines
+ \MH_if_dim:w
+ \MH_if_dim:w \@totalleftmargin=\z@
+ \linewidth
+ \MH_else:
+ -\maxdimen
+ \MH_fi:
+ =\columnwidth
+ \MH_else:
+ \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \MH_fi:
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \tagpdfsetup{paratag=Span}
+ \noindent\ignorespaces#1\par
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}}%
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayshortskip%
+ \vskip-\lineskiplimit
+ \vskip\normallineskiplimit
+ \vskip\l_MT_below_shortintertext_sep
+ }%
+ }
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% end hook
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \l_@@_mathtools_init_tl
+}
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b3e763ffddc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx (C) Copyright 2020-2022 Frank Mittelbach
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+%
+%
+% \title{Temporary output patches for tagging and better link support}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Ulrike Fischer}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file contains a few patches of internal \LaTeX{} commands
+% to support paragraph tagging across
+% page boundaries (in \pdfTeX) and improve the behaviour of links across page breaks.
+%
+% Until this get properly integrated with the kernel code this has
+% to be taken as a prototype and code, interfaces as well as
+% behavior may change without notice and certainly without any
+% backwards compatibility!
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt} \PrintIndex }
+%
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*code>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesPackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-1}
+ [2022-11-94 v0.1a Temporary output patches for tagging and better link support]
+\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patching the OR}
+% This adds hooks around header and footer, in \cs{@makecol} and in multicol.
+% At first initialize some of the hooks. We use providecommand to avoid problems if
+% the kernel changes here and provides them directly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\@kernel@before@head{}
+\providecommand\@kernel@before@foot{}
+\providecommand\@kernel@after@head{}
+\providecommand\@kernel@after@foot{}
+\providecommand\@mult@ptagging@hook{}% multicol
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+\patchcmd\@outputpage
+ {\vfil\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thehead}\color@endbox}
+ {\vfil\@kernel@before@head\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thehead}\color@endbox\@kernel@after@head}
+ {\typeout{Patching header in \string\@outputpage}}{\PATCHerror }
+
+
+\patchcmd\@outputpage
+ {\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thefoot}\color@endbox}
+ {\@kernel@before@foot\color@hbox\normalcolor\hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thefoot}\color@endbox\@kernel@after@foot}
+ {\typeout{Patching footer in \string\@outputpage}}{\PATCHerror }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
+% We have to patch \cs{@makecol} in two places:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% update 255 up front to add missing tmb/tme if necessary
+% \item
+% update the \cs{footins} stream if that one got split
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% We patch \cs{@makecol}, if new-or-2 is loaded too it will overwrite that again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand\@kernel@before@footins{}
+ \providecommand\@kernel@before@cclv{}
+
+ \patchcmd\@makecol
+ {\vskip\skip\footins}
+ {\vskip\skip\footins\@kernel@before@footins}
+ {\typeout{Patching \string\@makecol\space for tagging}}{\PATCHerror }
+
+%for some reason patching with etoolbox only works in this order ...
+
+ \pretocmd\@makecol{\@kernel@before@cclv}
+ {\typeout{Patching \string\@makecol\space for tagging}}{\PATCHerror }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{\pkg{multicol} adjustments}
+%
+% The patches for pkg{multicol} are fairly minimal:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item At the start of the environment anything already on the
+% page is picked up and stored in \cs{partial@page}, we may need to add
+% a TMB to that (it should have a proper TME). This has to happen
+% in the \enquote{main} stream context.
+% \item
+% \item
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{package/multicol/after}
+ {% multicol needs later loading
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \patchcmd\page@sofar
+ {\setbox\z@\hbox{p}\global\dimen\tw@\dp\z@}%
+ {%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{p}\global\dimen\tw@\dp\z@
+ \@mult@ptagging@hook
+ }%
+ {\typeout{Patching \string\page@sofar\space for tagging}}{\PATCHerror}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Interrupt hooks}
+% This requires the l3pdfannot module!
+% We add the code here and not in hyperref, as it should also work with links
+% created directly with the l3pdfannot commands. The file is only
+% loaded by the pdfmanagement, so no need to test if the commands exist.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+\def\@kernel@before@head{\pdfannot_link_off:}
+\def\@kernel@before@foot{\pdfannot_link_off:}
+\def\@kernel@after@head {\pdfannot_link_on:}
+\def\@kernel@after@foot {\pdfannot_link_on:}
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</code>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx
index 08b58a72860..74d56d687f6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-%% File: latex-lab-new-or.dtx
+%% File: latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx
% Copyright (C) 2022 The LaTeX Project
%
% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
@@ -22,14 +22,14 @@
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\begin{document}
- \DocInput{latex-lab-new-or.dtx}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx}
\end{document}
%</driver>
%
% \fi
%
%
-% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-new-or} code\thanks{}}
+% \title{The \texttt{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2} code\thanks{}}
% \author{Frank Mittelbach, \LaTeX{} Project}
%
% \maketitle
@@ -128,8 +128,8 @@
%
% \subsection{File declaration}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesFile{latex-lab-new-or.ltx}
- [2022-03-09 v0.1b changes to the output routine]
+\ProvidesPackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2}
+ [2022-11-04 v0.1c changes to the output routine]
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{\cs{@makecol} reimplementation}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dc90c76e996
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,810 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: sec-tagging.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \title{The \textsf{sec-tagging} package\\
+% Changes related to the tagging of sectioning commands}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}}
+% \date{v0.81 2023-02-12}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}}
+% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}}
+% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class
+% customizations}}
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% The following code implements a first draft for the tagging of sectioning commands.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \section{Limitations}
+%
+% Sectioning commands are in not defined by the format but by the classes.
+% Their implementation vary: some are defined with the help of \cs{@startsection},
+% some are like \cs{chapter} handcrafted,
+% some build with the help of extension packages or as in the KOMA classes
+% with class code that extends the \cs{@startsection} functionality.
+%
+% The following code can therefore currently be used \emph{only} with the standard classes
+% or with classes which do not overwrite the changed definitions.
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% Tagging of sectioning commands consist of two parts:
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The heading/title text of the section should be surrounded by a
+% heading tag, typically \texttt{Hn} with some value of \texttt{n}.
+% The number of the section command can optionally be put in a \texttt{Lbl}.
+% The number of the \texttt{Hn} tag should reflect the \enquote{natural} level.
+% So in an article \cs{section} will use \texttt{H1}, in a book \cs{chapter} will use
+% \texttt{H1} and \cs{section} \texttt{H2}.
+% Titles of \cs{part} are a bit out of this system as they are normally
+% not part of the hierarchy: often only some chapters are grouped under a part.
+% Their title is therefore tagged as \texttt{Title}.
+% \item
+% The whole section should normally be surrounded by
+% a \texttt{Sect} tag. Parts should be surrounded by \texttt{Part}.
+% It is a bit unclear if the headings should be inside or outside of these
+% structures---the best practice guide puts them outside---but on the whole
+% it sounds more logical to group the heading with the text inside the \texttt{Sect}.
+% For the part this is actually required, as there can be only one \texttt{Title}
+% in a structure, so the part title can't be at the same level as the
+% document \texttt{Title}.
+%
+% Starting such an enclosing \texttt{Sect} structure is rather easy,
+% but closing it requires code in various place,
+% for example the commands \cs{mainmatter}, \cs{backmatter},
+% \cs{frontmatter} and \cs{appendix} should typically close everything.
+% Following sectioning commands should close all previous structures
+% with a level equal or higher than their own level.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \section{Technical details and problems}
+%
+% The implementation has to take care of various details.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item As sections in \LaTeX{} are not environments, the
+% \texttt{<Sect>} structures can be wrongly nested with other structures. For example
+% if a document puts a sectioning command into a list or a trivlist or
+% a minipage then it can no longer close previous \texttt{<Sect>} structures correctly.
+% The problem can be detected by checking the structure stack
+% and a warning can be issued, but the author then has to close the structures
+% manually before the list or minipage.
+%
+% Thus there have to be user interfaces to handle such cases.
+% It should also be possible not to create all the \texttt{<Sect>} structures
+% automatically but to tag only the headings so that the author can handle special
+% cases manually.
+%
+% \item If hyperref is used, targets for links should be inserted, either with
+% \cs{refstepcounter} or manually with \cs{MakeLinkTarget}. These targets must be
+% in the correct structure for the structure destinations. They replace some
+% of the current patches in hyperref.
+%
+% \item With lualatex the mc-commands set attributes \emph{locally}, so the
+% commands must be at the right grouping level.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{Funktions and keys}
+%
+% \begin{function}{\tag_tool:n,\tagtool}
+%
+% \end{function}
+%
+% \subsection{TODO}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item A dedicated command to close a sectioning unit should be provided.
+%
+% \item A dedicated command to open a sectioning unit should be provided too.
+%
+% \item It should also be possible to suppress the sectioning unit in sectioning commands
+% to allow e.g. to put an epigraph or similar in front.
+%
+% \item The number in \cs{part} and \cs{chapter} is currently not correctly
+% tagged as a \texttt{Lbl} as this requires to redefine the internal (class dependant)
+% commands too.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-sec-tagging} {2022-10-25} {0.8}
+ {Code related to the tagging of sectioning commands}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Surrounding by \texttt{Sect} structures}
+% We use a stack to record the levels of the open \texttt{Sect}. The first item
+% has level -100. A sectioning command will take a record from the stack. If its level is
+% greater or equal it closes this structure and takes the next record from the stack.
+% If the record has a smaller level then it puts it back and stops.
+% The stack is compared with the main structure stack, if they don't match
+% it means we can't safely close the \texttt{Sect} and so we issue a warning
+% and do nothing.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Loading general kernel changes}
+% [kernel?]
+% Also loaded in the toc-tagging code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-kernel-changes}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsubsection{Glyphtounicode improvements}
+%
+% As lualatex runs with legacy encodings in the test files, we enable and
+% load glyphtounicode. For the math we load additional definitions.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernelchange>
+\ifdefined\directlua
+ \pdfvariable gentounicode =1
+ \protected\def\pdfglyphtounicode {\pdfextension glyphtounicode }
+ \input{glyphtounicode}
+\fi
+ \input{glyphtounicode-cmex}
+%</kernelchange>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{updating \cs{@currentHref}}
+% [kernel?]
+%
+% We must ensure that manual targets (e.g. in unnumbered sections)
+% correctly update \cs{@currentHref}. For this we extend the kernel definition of
+% \cs{MakeLinkTarget}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernelchange>
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+\int_new:N\g__kernel_target_int
+\RenewDocumentCommand\MakeLinkTarget{sO{}m}
+ {%
+ \ifvmode
+ \special{}%
+ \else
+ \@savsf\spacefactor
+ \smash{}%
+ \spacefactor\@savsf
+ \fi
+ \int_gincr:N\g__kernel_target_int
+ \tl_gset:Nx \@currentHref {target*.\int_use:N\g__kernel_target_int}
+ }
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+%</kernelchange>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsubsection{Tagging commands}
+%
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\g__tag_sec_stack_seq}
+% The stack holds the tag and the level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\seq_new:N \g__tag_sec_stack_seq
+\seq_gpush:Nn\g__tag_sec_stack_seq {{Document}{-100}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{variable}{\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool}
+% This boolean controls if a Sect structure is opened.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_new:N \l__tag_sec_Sect_bool
+\bool_set_true:N\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__tag_sec_begin:nn}
+% This starts a sectioning structure.
+% Currently the tag is fix, either Sect or Part, depending on the level,
+% but this will perhaps change. The second argument is currently unused.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn\__tag_sec_begin:nn #1 #2 %#1 level #2 keyval
+ {
+ \tag_struct_begin:n
+ {
+ tag= {\int_compare:nNnTF {#1}={-1}{Part}{Sect}}
+ ,#2
+ }
+ \seq_gpush:Nx \g__tag_sec_stack_seq {{\g__tag_struct_tag_tl}{#1}}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__tag_sec_end:n}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnn { tag } {wrong-sect-nesting}
+ {
+ The~structure~#1~can~not~be~closed.\\
+ It~is~not~equal~to~the~current~structure~#2~on~the~main~stack
+ }
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn\__tag_sec_end:n #1 % #1 level
+ {
+ \seq_get:NN \g__tag_sec_stack_seq \l__tag_tmpa_tl
+ \int_compare:nNnT {#1}<{\exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_ii:nn\l__tag_tmpa_tl+1}
+ {
+ \seq_get:NN\g__tag_struct_tag_stack_seq \l__tag_tmpb_tl
+ \exp_args:Nee
+ \tl_if_eq:nnTF
+ {\exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn\l__tag_tmpa_tl}
+ {\exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn\l__tag_tmpb_tl}
+ {
+ \seq_gpop:NN \g__tag_sec_stack_seq \l__tag_tmpa_tl
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \__tag_sec_end:n {#1}
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_warning:nnxx {tag}{wrong-sect-nesting}
+ { \exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn \l__tag_tmpa_tl }
+ { \exp_last_unbraced:NV\use_i:nn \l__tag_tmpb_tl }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\__tag_tool_para_split:}
+% Runin-sectioning command must separate the heading from the following text.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \__tag_tool_para_split:
+ {
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=\l__tag_para_tag_default_tl}
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{}
+ \__tag_setup_restore_para_default:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\__tag_setup_restore_para_default:}
+% We change the para tagging in the sectioning code.
+% This here restores the default. Currently it only resets the
+% the tag, but perhaps more will be needed later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \__tag_setup_restore_para_default:
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {text-unit}
+ \tl_set_eq:NN\l__tag_para_tag_tl\l__tag_para_tag_default_tl
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\__tag_sec_end_display:}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \__tag_sec_end_display:
+ {
+ \tag_struct_end: %P = Hn
+ \__tag_setup_restore_para_default:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Open sec structures should be closed at the end of the document. This should
+% be done before tagpdf closes the Document structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\hook_gput_code:nnn{tagpdf/finish/before}{tagpdf/sec}{\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}}
+\hook_gset_rule:nnnn {tagpdf/finish/before}{tagpdf/sec}{before}{tagpdf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The commands \cs{mainmatter}, \cs{backmatter}, \cs{frontmatter} and
+% \cs{appendix} close all \texttt{Sect} and \texttt{Part} structures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{cmd/frontmatter/before}{\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}}
+\AddToHook{cmd/mainmatter/before} {\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}}
+\AddToHook{cmd/backmatter/before} {\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}}
+\AddToHook{cmd/appendix/before} {\__tag_sec_end:n{-10}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Tagging tools}
+% We need to provide user and package level commands
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_if_free:NT \tag_tool:n
+ {
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \tag_tool:n #1
+ {
+ \tag_if_active:T { \keys_set:nn {tag / tool}{#1} }
+ }
+ \cs_set_eq:NN\tagtool\tag_tool:n
+ }
+\keys_define:nn { tag / tool}
+ {
+ ,sec-start-part .code:n =
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool
+ {
+ \__tag_sec_end:n {-1}
+ \__tag_sec_begin:nn{-1}{tag=Part}
+ }
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=part,title=#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We remap here the text-unit from the paragraph to NonStruct.
+% It would be better to suppress it completly as with the other
+% sectioning commands, but this would require to redefine \cs{@spart}
+% and \cs{@part}, as there is the grouping, and these commands are
+% all slightly different in the standard classes. So this is delayed
+% to the time when sectioning commands are redefined with templates.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {NonStruct}
+ \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl {Span}
+ }
+ ,sec-stop-part .code:n = {\__tag_sec_end_display:}
+ ,sec-start-chapter .code:n =
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool
+ {
+ \__tag_sec_end:n {0}
+ \__tag_sec_begin:nn{0}{tag=Sect}
+ }
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=chapter,title=#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% similar to part we remap to NonStruct for now ...
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_main_tag_tl {NonStruct}
+ \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl {Span}
+ }
+ ,sec-stop-chapter .meta:n = { sec-stop-part}
+ ,sec-start .code:n = % #1 is a name like "section"
+ {
+ \bool_if:NT\l__tag_sec_Sect_bool
+ {
+ \__tag_sec_end:n {\use:c{toclevel@#1}+0}
+ \__tag_sec_begin:nn {\use:c{toclevel@#1}+0}{tag=Sect}
+ }
+ \tl_set:Nn\l__tag_para_tag_tl{#1}
+ }
+ ,sec-start .value_required:n = true
+ ,sec-split-para .code:n = {\__tag_tool_para_split:}
+ ,restore-para .code:n = {\__tag_setup_restore_para_default:}
+ ,sec-stop .code:n =
+ {
+ \par\__tag_sec_end:n {\use:c{toclevel@#1}+0}
+ }
+ ,sec-stop .value_required:n = true
+ ,sec-add-grouping .bool_set:N = \l__tag_sec_Sect_bool
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Sectioning commands}
+%
+% \subsection{\cs{part} and \cs{chapter}}
+%
+% \cs{part} and \cs{chapter} are defined by the classes.
+% To tag them we redefine the user commands.
+% This will probably break with various classes and with titlesec.
+% The tagging inside relies on the para tagging.
+% We do not yet use keyval in the optional argument, as this requires latex-dev
+% and the naming of the keys and their key family is unclear.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{class/after}
+ {
+ \@ifundefined{chapter}
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This redefines \cs{part} in article class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentCommand\part{ s O{#3} m }
+ {
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \addvspace{4ex}%
+ \@afterindentfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This are the tagging commands needed at the begin. They open a Part structure
+% and the structure for the title of the heading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ % tagging start commands
+ \tag_tool:n {sec-start-part=#2}
+ % end tagging start commands
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This adds a manual target if the part is unnumbered or starred.
+% It replaces the hyperref patches.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_lazy_any:nT
+ {
+ { #1 }
+ {
+ \int_compare_p:nNn {\c@secnumdepth}<{-1}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ \MakeLinkTarget[part]{}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The main call to the underlying commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \IfBooleanTF
+ {#1}
+ { \@spart {#3} }
+ { \@part [#2]{#3} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and now the closing command for the tagging of the title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_tool:n {sec-stop-part}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Redefinitions for book and report
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \RenewDocumentCommand\chapter{ s O{#3} m }
+ {
+ \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \global\@topnum\z@
+ \@afterindentfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This are the tagging commands needed at the begin. They open a Sect structure
+% and the structure for the title of the heading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_tool:n { sec-start-chapter= #2 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This adds a manual target if the chapter is unnumbered or starred.
+% It replaces the hyperref patches.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_lazy_any:nT
+ {
+ { #1 }
+ {
+ \int_compare_p:nNn {\c@secnumdepth}<{0}
+ }
+ {
+ %in book target also needed in frontmatter
+ \bool_lazy_and_p:nn
+ { \cs_if_exist_p:c { @mainmattertrue } }
+ { ! \legacy_if_p:n { @mainmatter } }
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ \MakeLinkTarget[chapter]{}
+ %todo public function for this update!
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref
+ {
+ \prop_gput:Nxx \g__tag_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The main call to the underlying commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \IfBooleanTF
+ {#1}
+ { \@schapter {#3} }
+ { \@chapter [#2]{#3} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and now the closing command for the tagging of the title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_tool:n {sec-stop-chapter}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and similar for \cs{part}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RenewDocumentCommand\part{ s O{#3} m }
+ {
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \onecolumn
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \null\vfil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This are the tagging commands needed at the begin. They open a Part structure
+% and the structure for the title of the heading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_tool:n {sec-start-part=#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This adds a manual target if the part is unnumbered or starred.
+% It replaces the hyperref patches.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_lazy_any:nT
+ {
+ { #1 }
+ {
+ \int_compare_p:nNn {\c@secnumdepth}<{-1}
+ }
+ {
+ %in book target also needed in frontmatter
+ \bool_lazy_and_p:nn
+ { \cs_if_exist_p:c { @mainmattertrue } }
+ { ! \legacy_if_p:n { @mainmatter } }
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ \MakeLinkTarget[part]{}
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref
+ {
+ \prop_gput:Nxx \g__tag_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The main call to the underlying commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \IfBooleanTF
+ {#1}
+ { \@spart {#3} }
+ { \@part [#2]{#3} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and now the closing command for the tagging of the title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_tool:n{sec-stop-part}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Sectioning commands based on \cs{@startsection}}
+%
+% The tagging of relies again on the para tagging:
+% we simply exchange the tag name by the one given as \#1.
+% This assumes that a tag with the name of the sectioning type is defined.
+% We don't try to pass the title, this will be done together with
+% the new keyval handling in the user command.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Hyperref code}
+% hyperref has to insert anchors. If the sectioning is numbered this is done by
+% \cs{refstepcounter} (and so in vmode). For unnumbered section hyperref
+% injects the anchor in hmode before the text, it also inserts a
+% kern to compensate the indent.
+%
+% This means that the target of numbered and unnumbered sectioning commands
+% differ, both regarding the location and in relation to the
+% tagging structure: The anchor from the \cs{refstepcounter} is outside of
+% the structure created by the heading title if the para tags are used,
+% while the other anchors are inside and so the structure destinations are different.
+%
+% We unify this by suppressing the anchor from the refstepcounter.
+% Also we only go back if the indent is positive.
+%
+% At first suppress all hyperref patches related to sectioning:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hyper@nopatch@sectioning{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hyp@section@target@nnn}
+% A simple internal command. There is no need for something public,
+% as packages defining their own version of \cs{@startsection} will
+% probably need something slightly different based on \cs{MakeLinkTarget}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@hyp@section@target@nnn #1 #2 #3 %#1 optarg #2 name/counter, #3 indent
+ {
+ \makebox[0pt][l]
+ {
+ \skip_set:Nn \@tempskipa {#3}
+ \dim_compare:nNnF {\@tempskipa}<{0pt}{\kern-\@tempskipa}
+ \MakeLinkTarget#1{#2}
+ }
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref
+ {
+ \prop_gput:Nxx \g__tag_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}}
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Adaption of the heading commands}
+% We add to \cs{@startsection} the commands to open the \texttt{Sect}
+% structure and to change the para tag.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \tag_tool:n { sec-start=#1}%new
+ \@ifstar
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To be able to correctly tag the number we need a special
+% \cs{@hangfrom} variant. This is a bit tricky:
+% As the paragraph starts after the \cs{setbox} luatex attributes
+% are not set yet and numbers are unmarked if one doesn't pay attention.
+% The code assumes that we are in vmode!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@tag@hangfrom #1
+ {
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=\l__tag_para_tag_tl}
+ \tagstructbegin{tag=Lbl}
+ \setbox\@tempboxa
+ \hbox
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In lua mode we have to set the attributes inside the box!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_lazy_and:nnT
+ {\tag_if_active_p:}
+ {\g__tag_mode_lua_bool}
+ {\tagmcbegin{tag=Lbl}}
+ {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We stop tagging now, to avoid that the \cs{noindent} triggers
+% the paratagging. We do not disable paratagging completely, to
+% avoid that the numbering goes wrong.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_stop:n{hangfrom}
+ \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restart tagging and insert the box.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tag_start:n{hangfrom}
+ \tagmcbegin{}\box\@tempboxa\tagmcend\tagstructend\tagmcbegin{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This command is used to tag the numbers of runin. We do not try
+% to avoid the empty container from the paratagging, this would require
+% more changes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@kernel@tag@svsec
+ {
+ \tag_mc_end_push:
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl}
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{}
+ \@svsec
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \tag_mc_begin_pop:n{}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{@sect} is only changed to replace the hyperref patches
+% and to use the new \cs{@kernel@tag@hangfrom} and \cs{@kernel@tag@svsec}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+ \def\@svsec{\@hyp@section@target@nnn{[section]}{}{#3}}
+ \else
+ \LinkTargetOff
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%
+ \LinkTargetOn
+ \protected@edef\@svsec{\@hyp@section@target@nnn{}{#1}{#3}\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup
+ \tagtool{para-flattened=true} % or \bool_set_true\l__tag_para_flattened_bool
+ #6{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+ \@hangfrom {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
+ \else
+ \@kernel@tag@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
+ \fi
+ \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
+ \endgroup
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #7}%
+ \else
+ \def\@svsechd{%
+ #6{\hskip #3\relax
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+ \@svsec
+ \else
+ \@kernel@tag@svsec
+ \fi #8}%
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #7}}%
+ \fi
+ \@xsect{#5}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% similar for \cs{@ssect}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@tempskipa #3\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup
+ \tagtool{para-flattened=true}
+ #4{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #1\relax\@hyp@section@target@nnn{[section]}{}{#1}}%
+ \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax\@hyp@section@target@nnn{[section]}{}{#3}\relax #5}}%
+ \fi
+ \@xsect{#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At last \cs{@xsect} needs code in two places. For display headings it has to
+% restore the default para code, for run in headings it has to separated the
+% heading from the following text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xsect#1{%
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \par \nobreak
+ \vskip \@tempskipa
+ \tag_tool:n {restore-para}
+ \@afterheading
+ \else
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \global\@noskipsectrue
+ \everypar{%
+ \if@noskipsec
+ \global\@noskipsecfalse
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+ \clubpenalty\@M
+ \begingroup \@svsechd \endgroup
+ \unskip
+ \tag_tool:n {sec-split-para}
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \hskip -\@tempskipa
+ \else
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+ \everypar{}%
+ \fi}%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latex-lab>
+\ProvidesFile{sec-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2023-02-12 v0.81 code related to the tagging of sectioning commands]
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-sec-tagging}
+%</latex-lab>
+% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx
index d8d9c671c39..217605d189b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-testphase.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
%% File: latex-lab-testphase.dtx
-% Copyright (C) 2021-2022 The LaTeX Project
+% Copyright (C) 2021-2023 The LaTeX Project
%
% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
@@ -51,14 +51,60 @@
%
%
% \section{The Implementation}
+% new-or-1 contains the code for header and footer (tagging and
+% suppressing links) and is always loaded
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*new-or-1>
+\ProvidesFile{new-or-1-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper new-or-1]
+%</new-or-1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% new-or combines all new-or parts (currently 1+2)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*new-or>
+\ProvidesFile{new-or-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper new-or]
+%</new-or>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*phase-I>
+\ProvidesFile{phase-I-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2023-02-04 v0.1b latex-lab wrapper phase-I]
+%</phase-I>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*phase-II>
+\ProvidesFile{phase-II-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper phase-II]
+%</phase-II>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*phase-III>
+\ProvidesFile{phase-III-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2023-03-06 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper phase-III]
+\input{phase-II-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging}
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-sec-tagging}
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-toc-tagging}
+%</phase-III>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% this is only provided for compatibility
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tagpdf>
+\ProvidesFile{tagpdf-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2022-11-04 v0.1a latex-lab wrapper tagpdf (deprecated)]
+%</tagpdf>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II|new-or|new-or-1>
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-1}
+%</tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II|new-or|new-or-1>
+% \end{macrocode}
% New output routine code is loaded in phase-II and new-or:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*tagpdf|phase-II|new-or>
-\IfFileExists{latex-lab-testphase-new-or.sty}
- {
- \RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or}
- }
- {}
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2}
%</tagpdf|phase-II|new-or>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -70,15 +116,33 @@
\AddToDocumentProperties [document]{testphase/tagpdf}{loaded}
%</tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II>
%<tagpdf|phase-II>\tagpdfsetup{activate,paratagging,interwordspace}
+%<tagpdf|phase-II>\AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging/para}{active}
%<phase-I>\tagpdfsetup{activate,interwordspace}
%<*tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II>
\AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging}{active}
-\AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging/para}{active}
\AddToDocumentProperties [document]{tagging/interwordspace}{active}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</tagpdf|phase-I|phase-II>
% \end{macrocode}
+% Wrapper files for math tagging:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*math-lab>
+\ProvidesFile{math-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2023-01-07 v0.8 code related to the math tagging]
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-math}
+%</math-lab>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*math-sty>
+\ProvidesPackage{latex-lab-testphase-math}
+ [2023-01-07 v0.8 code related to the math tagging]
+\input{latex-lab-mathtagging.ltx}
+\input{latex-lab-amsmath.ltx}
+\input{latex-lab-mathtools.ltx}
+\input{latex-lab-mathpkg.ltx}
+%</math-sty>
+% \end{macrocode}
% \Finale
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ea39e3a6a58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: toc-hyperref-changes.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+% \title{The \textsf{toc-hyperref-changes} package\\
+% Changes and additions to hyperref related to toc entries}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}}
+% \date{Version 0.81 2023-02-10}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}}
+% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}}
+% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class
+% customizations}}
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% The followings contains various change needed for hyperref for the new toc tagging
+% code. They should be only loaded if hyperref is used!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Changes for hyperref}
+% \subsection{\cs{contentsline},\cs{addcontentsline}}
+% The standard \cs{contentsline} and \cs{addcontentsline}
+% should also be used with hyperref (together
+% with more changes below) so we have to disable the redefinition in hyperref (this
+% requires hyperref version 7.00v!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hyper@nopatch@toc{}
+\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after}
+ {
+ \@ifpackagelater{hyperref}{2023-02-07}{}
+ {\PackageWarning{latex-lab-testphase-toc-tagging}{hyperref too old}{}}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Add links to toc entries}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+\AddToHook{package/hyperref/after}
+ {
+ \AddToHook{contentsline/text/before}[hyp]
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@contentsline@arg@two%text
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF\@contentsline@arg@four%destination
+ {
+ \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc}
+ {
+ {0}{} %none
+ {1}{\hyper@linkstart{link}{\@contentsline@arg@four}} %section
+ {2}{} %page
+ }
+ {\hyper@linkstart{link}{\@contentsline@arg@four}} %all
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ \AddToHook{contentsline/text/after}[hyp]
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@contentsline@arg@two
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF\@contentsline@arg@four
+ {
+ \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc}
+ {
+ {0}{} %none
+ {1}{\hyper@linkend} %section
+ {2}{} %page
+ }
+ {\hyper@linkend} %all
+ } % none
+ }
+ }
+
+ \AddToHook{contentsline/page/before}[hyp]
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@contentsline@arg@three
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF\@contentsline@arg@two
+ {
+ \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc}
+ {
+ {0}{} %none
+ {1}{} %section
+ {2}{\hyper@linkstart{link}{\@contentsline@arg@four}} %page
+ }
+ {\hyper@linkstart{link}{\@contentsline@arg@four}} %all
+ } % none
+ }
+ }
+ \AddToHook{contentsline/page/after}[hyp]
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@contentsline@arg@three
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF\@contentsline@arg@four
+ {
+ \int_case:nnF {\Hy@linktoc}
+ {
+ {0}{} %none
+ {1}{} %section
+ {2}{\hyper@linkend} %page
+ }
+ {\hyper@linkend} %all
+ } % none
+ }
+ }
+ \AddToHook{cmd/addcontentsline/before}[hyp]
+ {%
+ \ExpandArgs{ooo}
+ \Hy@addcontentsline@addbookmark
+ {\addcontentsline@arg@one}
+ {\addcontentsline@arg@two}
+ {\addcontentsline@arg@three}%
+ }
+ }
+\ExplSyntaxOff
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Add bookmark code to \cs{addcontentsline}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\Hy@addcontentsline@addbookmark[3]%#1 toc type, #2 level, #3 content
+ {%
+ \ifx\@currentHref\@empty
+ \Hy@Warning{%
+ No destination for bookmark of \string\addcontentsline,%
+ \MessageBreak destination is added%
+ }%
+ \phantomsection
+ \fi
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname\relax
+ \begingroup
+ \def\Hy@tempa{#1}%
+ \ifx\Hy@tempa\Hy@bookmarkstype
+ \Hy@WarningNoLine{%
+ bookmark level for unknown #2 defaults to 0%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \Hy@Info{bookmark level for unknown #2 defaults to 0}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname{0}%
+ \fi
+ \edef\Hy@toclevel{\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname}%
+ \Hy@writebookmark{\csname the#2\endcsname}%
+ {#3}%
+ {\@currentHref}%
+ {\Hy@toclevel}%
+ {#1}%
+ \ifHy@verbose
+ \begingroup
+ \def\Hy@tempa{#3}%
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\Hy@tempa
+ \let\temp@online\on@line
+ \let\on@line\@empty
+ \Hy@Info{%
+ bookmark\temp@online:\MessageBreak
+ thecounter {\csname the#2\endcsname}\MessageBreak
+ text {\Hy@tempa}\MessageBreak
+ reference {\@currentHref}\MessageBreak
+ toclevel {\Hy@toclevel}\MessageBreak
+ type {#1}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7485b2c2106
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,443 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: toc-kernel-functions.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \title{The \textsf{toc-kernel-changes} package\\
+% Changes and additions to the kernel related to tagging and links in toc entries}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}}
+% \date{Version 0.81 2023-02-10}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}}
+% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}}
+% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class
+% customizations}}
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% The followings contains various changes to kernel commands
+% needed for the tagging of table of contents and similar lists.
+% \section{General kernel and class changes}
+%
+% Some of the changes can probably could go into the kernel.
+% This are marked with [kernel?],
+% the other are marked with [latex-lab]. A few changes must be done in the classes.
+% They are marked as [class]. They are inserted with hooks here: this will break
+% if a non-standard class is used.
+%
+% \subsection{Providing the counter representation \cs{theHxx} generally}
+% [kernel?]
+%
+% The \cs{theHxx} representation allows to create a unique representation of a counter
+% that is for example used to create destination names. It will also be needed
+% to add |/Ref| keys to various tagging structures. It makes therefore sense
+% to provide it by default as soon as a counter is created. The |\@addtoreset| change
+% (taken also from hyperref) tries to ensure the counter stays unique if it is reset.
+%
+% At first we suppress the patches from hyperref:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernelchange>
+\def\hyper@nopatch@counter{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@definecounter#1{\expandafter\newcount\csname c@#1\endcsname
+ \setcounter{#1}\z@
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname cl@#1\endcsname\@empty
+ \@addtoreset{#1}{@ckpt}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname p@#1\endcsname\@empty
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname theH#1\endcsname{\the\value{#1}}%new
+ \expandafter
+ \gdef\csname the#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter
+ {\expandafter\@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
+\def\@addtoreset#1#2{\expandafter\@cons\csname cl@#2\endcsname {{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname theH#1\endcsname{\csname theH#2\endcsname.\the\value{#1}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following counters are defined in the kernel
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\theHenumi{\the\value{enumi}}
+\gdef\theHenumii{\the\value{enumii}}
+\gdef\theHenumiii{\the\value{enumiii}}
+\gdef\theHenumiv{\the\value{enumiv}}
+\gdef\theHequation{\the\value{equation}}
+\gdef\theHfootnote{\the\value{footnote}}
+\gdef\theHmpfootnote{\the\value{mpfootnote}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Providing and updating \cs{@currentHref}}
+% [kernel?]
+%
+% \cs{@currentHref} contains the current unique representation of a counter.
+% It is useful also without hyperref as it allows to connect with a |/Ref|
+% key a toc entry with the heading it refers too. So \cs{refstepcounter}
+% is extended to update the command. This is done at the begin so that the
+% hyperref code can still adapt it later (using the cmd/refstepcounter/after hook
+% would be too late, and could also break with cleverref.)
+%
+% We also provide a kernel version that hyperref doesn't touch and so will never
+% set a target.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@currentHref{}
+\def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}%
+ \edef\@currentcounter{#1}%
+ \xdef\@currentHref {#1.\csname theH#1\endcsname}%
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+ {\csname p@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+}
+\let\@kernel@refstepcounter\refstepcounter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Assigning the headings level numbers}
+% [kernel?]
+%
+% The code for the toc must be able to compare the level of |subsection| against
+% |section|. So some numbers are needed. It uses for now the commands used by
+% |hyperref| for the bookmark levels. While headings are more a class thing, it
+% could make sense to provide a standard set already in the kernel.
+% The numbers are a bit different to the one in hyperref, but imho sensible.
+%
+% Note for the future:
+% once that heading stuff is turned into template
+% instances the template should set that number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel@part{-1}
+\def\toclevel@chapter{0}
+\def\toclevel@section{1}
+\def\toclevel@subsection{2}
+\def\toclevel@subsubsection{3}
+\def\toclevel@paragraph{4}
+\def\toclevel@subparagraph{5}
+\def\toclevel@figure{1}
+\def\toclevel@table{1}
+%</kernelchange>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{load kernel changes}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-kernel-changes}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\cs{contentsline} extension}
+% [latex-lab]
+% The tagging code must add code at the begin and end of \cs{contentsline}.
+% This code must have access to the arguments. We set it up as config point
+% for now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@contentsline@cfgpoint@before#1#2#3#4{}
+\def\@contentsline@cfgpoint@after#1#2#3#4{}
+\def\@contentsline@arg@one{}%level
+\def\@contentsline@arg@two{}%text
+\def\@contentsline@arg@three{}%page
+\def\@contentsline@arg@four{}%destination
+\def\contentsline#1#2#3#4%
+ {%
+ \def\@contentsline@arg@one{#1}%level
+ \def\@contentsline@arg@two{#2}%text
+ \def\@contentsline@arg@three{#3}%page
+ \def\@contentsline@arg@four{#4}%destination
+ \@contentsline@cfgpoint@before{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+ %\gdef\@contentsline@destination{#4}%
+ \csname l@#1\endcsname{#2}{#3}%
+ \@contentsline@cfgpoint@after{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\cs{addcontentsline} changes}
+% [latex-lab]
+%
+% \cs{addcontentsline} should always write the unique counter representation
+% \cs{@currentHref} so that we can create the |/Ref| key. At the same time
+% we need a hook, so that hyperref can add its bookmarks code. The generic hook
+% would be ok, but we need the arguments, so we store them first.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NewHook{cmd/addcontentsline/before}
+\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{% toc extension, type, tag
+ \def\addcontentsline@arg@one{#1}% name??
+ \def\addcontentsline@arg@two{#2}%
+ \def\addcontentsline@arg@three{#3}%
+ \UseHook{cmd/addcontentsline/before}%
+ \addtocontents{#1}{%
+ \protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{\thepage}{\@currentHref}\protected@file@percent
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\cs{@starttoc}}
+% [kernel?]
+%
+% We add a configuration point before and after reading the file
+% for the tagging.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@starttoc@cfgpoint@before#1{}
+\def\@starttoc@cfgpoint@after#1{}
+\def\@starttoc#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \makeatletter
+ \@starttoc@cfgpoint@before{#1}%
+ \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+ \@starttoc@cfgpoint@after{#1}
+ \if@filesw
+ \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+ \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+ \fi
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting of the toc entries}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Kernel commands}
+% [latex-lab] or [kernel?]?
+%
+% We need hooks before and after the content and before and after the page number.
+% The number needs some thing so that it can be tagged as label.
+% The text and the page
+% hooks are used in manual \cs{l@xx} commands and in \cs{l@xx} defined by
+% \cs{@dottedtocline} or by other means.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NewMirroredHookPair{contentsline/number/before}{contentsline/number/after}%
+\NewMirroredHookPair{contentsline/text/before}{contentsline/text/after}%
+\NewMirroredHookPair{contentsline/page/before}{contentsline/page/after}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The dot in the leader must be set as artifact.
+% But luatex requires that the mc are set outside the leaders.
+% So we need a config point.
+%
+% \cs{@dottedtocline} needs hooks and formatting commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dottedtocline@cfgpoint@leaders#1{#1}
+
+\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+ \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+ {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+ \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \leavevmode
+ \@tempdima #3\relax
+ \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/before}%
+ \csname contentsline@text@#1@format\endcsname{#4}%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/after}%
+ \nobreak
+ \@dottedtocline@cfgpoint@leaders{%
+ \leaders\hbox{$\m@th
+ \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep
+ mu$}\hfill}%
+ \nobreak
+ \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/before}%
+ #5%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/after}%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}%
+ \par}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{numberline}}
+% [kernel?]
+% Inside or outside the box?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/number/before}%
+ #1\hfil
+ \UseHook{contentsline/number/after}%
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{l@xx} in the classes}
+% Depending on the class we have to redefine also more commands
+% For other classes it should be documented what is needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{class/article/after}
+ {
+ \renewcommand*\l@part[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty
+ \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ {\leavevmode
+ \large \bfseries
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/before}%
+ \csname contentsline@text@-1@format\endcsname{#1}%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/after}%
+ \hfil
+ \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/before}%
+ #2%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/after}%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}}\par
+ \nobreak
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+\renewcommand*\l@section[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\z@
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty
+ \addvspace{1.0em \@plus\p@}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/before}%
+ \csname contentsline@text@1@format\endcsname{#1}%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/after}%
+ \nobreak\hfil
+ \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/before}%
+ #2%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/after}%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}\par
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+ }
+\AddToHook{class/report/after}
+ {
+ \renewcommand*\l@part[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ {\leavevmode
+ \large \bfseries
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/before}%
+ \csname contentsline@text@-1@format\endcsname{#1}%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/after}%
+ \hfil
+ \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/before}%
+ #2%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/after}%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}}\par
+ \nobreak
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+ \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/before}%
+ \csname contentsline@text@0@format\endcsname
+ {#1}%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/after}%
+ \nobreak\hfil
+ \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/before}%
+ #2%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/after}%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+ }
+\AddToHook{class/book/after}
+ {
+ \renewcommand*\l@part[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ {\leavevmode
+ \large \bfseries
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/before}%
+ \csname contentsline@text@-1@format\endcsname{#1}%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/after}%
+ \hfil
+ \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/before}%
+ #2%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/after}%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}}\par
+ \nobreak
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+ \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+ \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \leavevmode \bfseries
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/before}%
+ \csname contentsline@text@0@format\endcsname
+ {#1}%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/text/after}%
+ \nobreak\hfil
+ \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/before}%
+ #2%
+ \UseHook{contentsline/page/after}%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latex-lab>
+\ProvidesFile{toc-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}
+ [2022-10-26 v0.8 code related to the tagging of toc and similar lists]
+
+\RequirePackage{latex-lab-testphase-toc-tagging}
+
+%</latex-lab>
+% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..179e5a868e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% File: toc-tagging-functions.dtx (C) Copyright 2022-2023 LaTeX Project
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this
+% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+% of this license is in the file
+%
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+%
+% The development version of the bundle can be found below
+%
+% https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/required/latex-lab
+%
+% for those people who are interested or want to report an issue.
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{l3doc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \title{The \textsf{toc-tagging-functions} package\\
+% Tagpdf functions related to the tagging of toc and similar lists}
+% \author{\LaTeX{} Project\thanks{Initial implementation done by Ulrike Fischer}}
+% \date{Version 0.81 2023-02-10}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \newcommand{\xt}[1]{\textsl{\textsf{#1}}}
+% \newcommand{\TODO}[1]{\textbf{[TODO:} #1\textbf{]}}
+% \newcommand{\docclass}{document class \marginpar{\raggedright document class
+% customizations}}
+%
+% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% Header for the testphase package
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*header>
+\ProvidesExplPackage {latex-lab-testphase-toc-tagging} {2023-02-10} {0.81}
+ { commands related to the tagging of toc-like lists}
+%</header>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% The followings contains various functions related to the tagging of the
+% table of contents and similar list. The functions will at some time
+% be moved inside the tagpdf code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%<@@=tag>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Temporary variables}
+% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tl_new:N \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{General struct commands}
+% The following variables and commands are not restricted to toc, but
+% probably will be need in other places too.
+% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop}
+% This variable records for (some or all, not clear yet)
+% destination names the related structure number to allow
+% to reference them in a Ref. The key is the destination.
+% Moved into tagpdf!
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% We use \cs{refstepcounter} to store the relation between
+% destination names/\cs{@currentHref} and structure numbers
+%
+% TODO: the functions should be moved into tagpdf so that one
+% doesn't has to test if the prop exists or not.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{cmd/refstepcounter/after}
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref
+ {
+ \prop_if_exist:NT \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop
+ {
+ \prop_gput:Nxx \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\AddToHook{cmd/H@refstepcounter/after}
+ {
+ \tl_if_blank:VF \@currentHref
+ {
+ \prop_if_exist:NT \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop
+ {
+ \prop_gput:Nxx \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop {\@currentHref}{\tag_get:n{struct_num}}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop}
+% This variable contains structures whose Ref key should be updated
+% at the end to point to structured related with this destination.
+% As this is probably need in other places too, it is not only a toc-variable.
+% Moved into tagpdf!
+% \end{variable}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest:}
+% This command is executed and update the Ref keys
+% of the structures listed in |\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop|.
+% It is currently only relevant for the |TOCI|. But other structures
+% could need that later too.
+% The command is executed in the |tagpdf/finish/before| hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnn { tag } {struct-dest-unknown}
+ {
+ Destination~#1~has~no~related~structure.\\
+ /Ref~for~structure~#2~not~updated
+ }
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest:
+ {
+ \prop_map_inline:Nn\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop
+ {
+ \prop_get:NnNTF \g_@@_struct_dest_num_prop {##2} \l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ {
+ \@@_struct_gput_data_ref:ee
+ { ##1 }
+ { \tag_struct_object_ref:e{ \l_@@_tmpa_tl }}
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_warning:nnnn {tag}{struct-dest-unknown}{##2}{ ##1}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\hook_gput_code:nnn {tagpdf/finish/before}{tagpdf/struct/Ref}{\g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest:}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Toc code}
+% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_toc_level_int,\g_@@_toc_stack_seq}
+% |\g_@@_toc_level_int| records in a toc the current absolute level.
+% We must close open structures at the end of the toc, for this
+% we maintain a stack |\g_@@_toc_stack_seq|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \g_@@_toc_level_int
+\seq_new:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{variable}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\_tag_toc_starttoc_init:n}
+% The init code clears the stack, and set the level to -100
+% and start to TOC structure. We also disable paratagging.
+% The |/Title| is currently simply the type, but this could be done nicer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_starttoc_init:n #1
+ {
+ \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_para_bool
+ \seq_gclear:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq
+ \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_toc_level_int {-100}
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=TOC,title=#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now map it into the config point:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn\@starttoc@cfgpoint@before#1
+ {
+ \@@_toc_starttoc_init:n{#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_starttoc_finalize:}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_starttoc_finalize:
+ {
+ \int_step_inline:nn
+ {\seq_count:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq }
+ {\tag_struct_end:}
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \seq_gclear:N \g_@@_toc_stack_seq
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now map it into the config point:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn\@starttoc@cfgpoint@after#1
+ {
+ \@@_toc_starttoc_finalize:
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_end:n}
+% This commands ends all TOC on the stack with a level higher than the argument
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_end:n #1
+ {
+ \seq_get:NNT\g_@@_toc_stack_seq \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl
+ {
+ \bool_lazy_and:nnT
+ {
+ \str_if_eq_p:ee{\tl_head:N\l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl}{TOC}
+ }
+ {
+ \int_compare_p:nNn {#1}<{\tl_tail:N \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl}
+ }
+ {
+ \seq_gpop:NN\g_@@_toc_stack_seq \l_@@_toc_tmpa_tl
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \@@_toc_end:n{#1}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_toc_end:n {e}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_contentsline_begin:nnn}
+% This is main command executed at the begin of a |\contentsline|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_contentsline_begin:nnn #1 #2 #3 %#1 level, #2 content, #3 destination
+ {
+ \tag_if_active:T
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We detect the intended level by checking the value of |toclevel@...|
+% (currently only provided by hyperref, but should be there always).
+% To be on the safe side we set it to 1 if not defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ExpandArgs{c}\providecommand { toclevel@#1 }{ 1 } % just in case ...
+ \int_compare:nNnF { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } > {\use:c{c@tocdepth}}
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% if level goes up, start new sub TOC unless we are at the begin
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bool_lazy_and:nnT
+ { \int_compare_p:nNn { \g_@@_toc_level_int } > {-100} }
+ { \int_compare_p:nNn { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } > { \g_@@_toc_level_int } }
+ {
+ \seq_gpush:Nx \g_@@_toc_stack_seq {{TOC}\use:c{toclevel@#1}}
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=TOC}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% if level goes down close all TOC's with a higher level
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \int_compare:nNnT
+ { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } < { \g_@@_toc_level_int }
+ {
+ \@@_toc_end:e { \use:c{toclevel@#1} }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%if same level do nothing
+% update toclevel to the current level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_toc_level_int { \use:c{toclevel@#1} }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% now open the TOCI, the tagging of the
+% inner structure is left to the |\l@xxx| commands.
+% setting the title is not strictly necessary but looks nicer
+% but we have to remove the |\numberline|
+% \begin{NOTE}{UF}
+% perhaps keep the number? How to insert a space then
+% \end{NOTE}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \group_begin:
+ \text_declare_expand_equivalent:Nn \numberline \use_none:n
+ \exp_args:Nx \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=TOCI,title={\text_purify:n {#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The TOCI structure should get a /Ref, so we put a request with its destination
+% name into the prop.
+% \begin{NOTE}{UF}
+% This only works with hyperref currently. Without hyperref we
+% need to store fake names.
+% \end{NOTE}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \prop_gput:Nxx \g_@@_struct_ref_by_dest_prop
+ { \tag_get:n {struct_num} }{#3}
+ \seq_gpush:Nx \g_@@_toc_stack_seq {{TOCI}\use:c{toclevel@#1}}
+ \group_end:
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now map it into the config point:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn\@contentsline@cfgpoint@before#1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \@@_toc_contentsline_begin:nnn {#1}{#2}{#4}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@_toc_contentsline_end:n}
+% This is the closing code of a |\contentsline|.
+% If the contentsline was actually printed, the code has to
+% close the TOCI structure and to update the stack.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\msg_new:nnn {tag}{toc-no-TOCI}{Missing~TOCI~structure~on~toc~stack}
+
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_toc_contentsline_end:n #1 %#1 level name
+ {
+ \int_compare:nNnF { \use:c{toclevel@#1} } > {\use:c{c@tocdepth}}
+ {
+ \seq_gpop:NNT \g_@@_toc_stack_seq\l_@@_tmpa_tl
+ {
+ \str_if_eq:eeTF{\tl_head:N\l_@@_tmpa_tl}{TOCI}
+ {
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ }
+ {
+ \msg_warning:nn{tag}{toc-no-TOCI}
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we map it to the config point
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_set_protected:Npn \@contentsline@cfgpoint@after #1#2#3#4
+ {
+ \@@_toc_contentsline_end:n {#1}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Tagging of the content}
+% This need discussion.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{contentsline/text/before}[tagpdf]{%
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Reference}%
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Reference}}
+\AddToHook{contentsline/text/after}[tagpdf]{%
+ \tag_mc_end:}
+\AddToHook{contentsline/page/before}[tagpdf]{%
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Reference}}
+\AddToHook{contentsline/page/after}[tagpdf]{%
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \tag_struct_end:} %Reference
+\AddToHook{contentsline/number/before}[tagpdf]{%
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Lbl}%
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Lbl}}
+\AddToHook{contentsline/number/after}[tagpdf]{%
+ \tag_mc_end:
+ \tag_struct_end:
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{tag=Reference}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dottedtocline@cfgpoint@leaders#1{%
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact}\nobreak#1\nobreak\tag_mc_end:}
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins
index bc668a71e1d..ab77bbb846a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/latex-lab/latex-lab.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the dtx file(s) in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
-%% Copyright (C) 2021-2022 The LaTeX Project
+%% Copyright (C) 2021-2023 The LaTeX Project
%%
%%
%% This file is part of the `LaTeX-lab Bundle' for LaTeX.
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
This is a generated file.
-Copyright 2021,2022 LaTeX Project
+Copyright 2021-2023 LaTeX Project
This file was generated from file(s) of the `LaTeX-lab Bundle'.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -68,15 +68,48 @@ where one can also log issues in case there are any.
% #1-latex-lab-testphase.ltx
\generate{\file{phase-I-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{phase-I}}}
\generate{\file{phase-II-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{phase-II}}}
+\generate{\file{phase-III-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{phase-III}}}
+
\generate{\file{tagpdf-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{tagpdf}}}
\generate{\file{new-or-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{new-or}}}
+\generate{\file{new-or-1-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{new-or-1}}}
+
+\generate{\file{math-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{math-lab}}}
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-math.sty}{\from{latex-lab-testphase.dtx}{math-sty}}}
% support files (the new-or code is a private package to make life easier)
-\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-new-or.sty}{\from{latex-lab-new-or.dtx}{code}}}
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-2.sty}{\from{latex-lab-new-or-2.dtx}{code}}}
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-new-or-1.sty}{\from{latex-lab-new-or-1.dtx}{code}}}
\generate{\file{latex-lab-footmisc.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-footnotes.dtx}{footmisc}}}
\generate{\file{latex-lab-footnotes.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-footnotes.dtx}{kernel}}}
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-mathtagging.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-mathtagging.dtx}{kernel}}}
+
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-amsmath.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-amsmath.dtx}{kernel}}}
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-mathtools.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-mathtools.dtx}{kernel}}}
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-mathpkg.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-mathpkg.dtx}{kernel}}}
+
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-sec-tagging.sty}{\from{latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx}{package}}}
+\generate{\file{sec-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx}{latex-lab}}}
+
+
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-toc-tagging.sty}{%
+ \from{latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx}{header}
+ \from{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx}{package}
+ \from{latex-lab-toc-tagging-functions.dtx}{package}
+ \from{latex-lab-toc-hyperref-changes.dtx}{package}}}
+
+\generate{\file{toc-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{%
+ \from{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx}{latex-lab}}}
+
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-kernel-changes.sty}
+ {\from{latex-lab-toc-kernel-changes.dtx}{kernelchange}
+ \from{latex-lab-sec-tagging.dtx}{kernelchange}
+ }}
+
+\generate{\file{latex-lab-testphase-block-tagging.sty}{\from{latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx}{package}}}
+\generate{\file{block-tagging-latex-lab-testphase.ltx}{\from{latex-lab-block-tagging.dtx}{latex-lab}}}
\endbatchfile